FF210002
Owner’s Manual
BL00005164-206
EN
ii
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that
you have read this manual and understood its contents be-
fore using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be
read by all who use the product.
For the Latest Information
The latest versions of the manuals are available from:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/
The website can be accessed not only from
your computer but also from smartphones
and tablets. It also contains information on
the software license.
For information on rmware updates, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
iii
P
Chapter Index
1 Before You Begin 1
2 First Steps 37
3 Basic Photography and Playback 55
4 Movie Recording and Playback 63
5 Taking Photographs 71
6 The Shooting Menus 125
7 Playback and the Playback Menu 213
8 Network/USB Setting Menus 241
9 The Setup Menus 243
10 Shortcuts 285
11 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 307
12 Technical Notes 337
Menu List
iv
iv
Menu List
Menu List
Camera menu options are listed below.
Shooting Menus
Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies.
N
See page 125 for details.
Photo Menus
N
Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
P
1⁄4
1⁄4
IMAGE SIZE 126
IMAGE QUALITY 127
RAW RECORDING 128
SELECT JPEG/HEIF 129
FILM SIMULATION 130
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR 132
GRAIN EFFECT 132
COLOR CHROME EFFECT 133
2⁄4
2⁄4
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE 133
WHITE BALANCE 134
DYNAMIC RANGE 138
D RANGE PRIORITY 138
TONE CURVE 139
COLOR 139
SHARPNESS 139
HIGH ISO NR 140
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
P
3⁄4
3⁄4
CLARITY 140
LONG EXPOSURE NR 140
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER 141
COLOR SPACE 141
PIXEL MAPPING 141
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
142
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING 142
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
142
4⁄4
4⁄4
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
143
v
Menu List
Menu List
G AF/MF SETTING
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
FOCUS AREA 146
FOCUS MODE 146
AF MODE 146
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS 147
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION 151
AF POINT DISPLAY
yz
151
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS 151
PRE-AF 152
2⁄3
2⁄3
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
152
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
153
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING 155
AF+MF 157
MF ASSIST 158
FOCUS CHECK 158
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA 159
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
159
3⁄3
3⁄3
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
159
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY 160
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
161
TOUCH SCREEN MODE 162
A SHOOTING SETTING
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
FILTER SETTING 164
SPORTS FINDER MODE 164
PRE-SHOT sJ
165
SELF-TIMER 166
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING 167
SELF-TIMER LAMP 167
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING 168
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
169
2⁄3
2⁄3
AE BKT SETTING 170
FILM SIMULATION BKT 170
FOCUS BKT SETTING 170
PHOTOMETRY 170
SHUTTER TYPE 171
FLICKER REDUCTION 172
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING 172
IS MODE 173
3⁄3
3⁄3
ISO 173
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
173
xF
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
174
F FLASH SETTING
P
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING 175
RED EYE REMOVAL 175
TTL-LOCK MODE 176
LED LIGHT SETTING 176
COMMANDER SETTING 177
CH SETTING 177
B MOVIE SETTING
P
MOVIE MODE 178
HIGH SPEED REC 178
MEDIA REC SETTING 178
F IS MODE
178
F IS MODE BOOST
178
AUDIO SETTING 179
vi
Menu List
Movie Menus
N
Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.
B MOVIE SETTING
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
MOVIE SETTING LIST 182
SHOOTING MODE
182
MOVIE MODE 183
HIGH SPEED REC
184
MEDIA REC SETTING
185
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
189
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
190
F-Log/HLG RECORDING 191
2⁄3
2⁄3
DATA LEVEL SETTING 192
F PHOTOMETRY
192
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
192
F IS MODE
193
F IS MODE BOOST
193
F ISO
194
ZEBRA SETTING 194
ZEBRA LEVEL 194
3⁄3
3⁄3
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
195
TALLY LIGHT 195
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
196
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
196
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM
SETTING
196
xF
CUSTOM MODE SETTING
196
xF
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
196
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
F FILM SIMULATION
197
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
197
F WHITE BALANCE
198
F DYNAMIC RANGE
198
F TONE CURVE
198
F COLOR
198
F SHARPNESS
199
F HIGH ISO NR
199
2⁄2
2⁄2
INTERFRAME NR
199
F
PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION
200
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
200
vii
Menu List
Menu List
G AF/MF SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
F FOCUS AREA
201
F FOCUS MODE
201
F AF MODE
202
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
202
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
203
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING
203
F SUBJECT DETECTION
SETTING
203
F AF+MF
203
2⁄2
2⁄2
F MF ASSIST
204
F FOCUS CHECK
204
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
204
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
204
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
204
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
205
FOCUS CHECK LOCK 206
P AUDIO SETTING
P
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 207
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 207
MIC JACK SETTING 208
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
208
WIND FILTER 208
LOW CUT FILTER 208
HEADPHONES VOLUME 208
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING 209
Q TIME CODE SETTING
P
TIME CODE DISPLAY 210
START TIME SETTING 210
COUNT UP SETTING 211
DROP FRAME
211
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT 212
viii
Menu List
C PLAY BACK MENU
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
SWITCH SLOT 219
RAW CONVERSION 220
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION 222
ERASE 223
SIMULTANEOUSDELETE 225
CROP 225
RESIZE 226
PROTECT 227
C PLAY BACK MENU
P
2⁄3
2⁄3
IMAGE ROTATE 228
VOICE MEMO SETTING 229
RATING 230
COPY 231
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE 232
xF
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
234
SLIDE SHOW 234
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST 235
3⁄3
3⁄3
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) 237
instax PRINTER PRINT 238
DISP ASPECT 239
Before You Begin
The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
N
See page 219 for details.
ix
Menu List
Menu List
Setup Menus
Adjust basic camera settings.
N
See page 243 for details.
D USER SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
FORMAT 244
b AREA SETTING
245
DATE/TIME 245
TIME DIFFERENCE 246
Q a
247
x MY MENU SETTING
247
F MY MENU SETTING
247
SENSOR CLEANING 248
2⁄2
2⁄2
BATTERY AGE 248
RESET 249
REGULATORY 249
D SOUND SETTING
P
1⁄2
1⁄2
AF BEEP VOL. 250
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. 250
OPERATION VOL. 251
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
VOLUME
251
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
SOUND
251
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
252
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
252
PLAYBACK VOLUME 252
2⁄2
2⁄2 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK 253
D SCREEN SETTING
P
1⁄4
1⁄4
VIEW MODE SETTING 254
EVF BRIGHTNESS 254
EVF COLOR 254
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT 255
LCD BRIGHTNESS 256
LCD COLOR 256
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT 256
IMAGE DISP. 257
2⁄4
2⁄4
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS 257
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 258
NATURAL LIVE VIEW 258
F-Log VIEW ASSIST 259
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING 259
FRAMING GUIDELINE 260
AUTOROTATE PB 261
FOCUS SCALE UNITS 261
3⁄4
3⁄4
APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS 261
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING 262
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING 262
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) 263
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) 263
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING 264
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. 264
LOCATION INFO 265
4⁄4
4⁄4
SUB MONITOR SETTING 265
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR
266
x
Q MENU BACKGROUND
267
F
Q MENU BACKGROUND
267
x
Menu List
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
P
1⁄3
1⁄3
FOCUS LEVER SETTING 268
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
269
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
269
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING 269
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION
(Fn) SETTING
269
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING 269
COMMAND DIAL SETTING 270
o S.S OPERATION
270
2⁄3
2⁄3
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION 270
SHUTTER AF 271
SHUTTER AE 271
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS 271
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD 272
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING 272
AE/AF-LOCK MODE 274
AWB-LOCK MODE 274
3⁄3
3⁄3
a ISO BUTTON SETTING
275
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING 276
LOCK 278
D POWER MANAGEMENT
P
AUTO POWER OFF 279
PERFORMANCE 279
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING 280
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. 280
D SAVE DATA SETTING
P
FRAME NO. 281
EDIT FILE NAME 282
x CARD SLOT SETTING
282
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
282
SELECT FOLDER 283
COPYRIGHT INFO 283
DEFAULT CAPTION 284
GEOTAGGING 284
The Network/USB Settings Menu
Adjust camera network and USB settings. For more information,
visit:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/
xi
P
Table of Contents
Introduction .......................................................................................................... ii
For the Latest Information .......................................................................................... ii
Menu List ...............................................................................................................iv
Shooting Menus ..............................................................................................................iv
The Playback Menu ......................................................................................................viii
Setup Menus ......................................................................................................................ix
The Network/USB Settings Menu .......................................................................... x
Supplied Accessories ................................................................................... xxiii
About This Manual ........................................................................................xxiv
Symbols and Conventions ...................................................................................xxiv
Terminology .................................................................................................................. xxiv
1
Before You Begin 1
Before You Begin 1
Parts of the Camera ............................................................................................2
The Serial Number Plate ..............................................................................................6
The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable) .....................................................6
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) ...................................................................................7
The Selector .........................................................................................................................7
The WB Button ...................................................................................................................7
The Mode Dial ....................................................................................................................8
The DRIVE Button .............................................................................................................9
The Command Dials ....................................................................................................10
The Indicator Lamp ......................................................................................................11
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 12
The Eye Cup ......................................................................................................................13
Focusing the View nder ...........................................................................................13
Camera Displays ...............................................................................................14
The Electronic View nder ........................................................................................14
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 16
Choosing a Display Mode ........................................................................................18
Adjusting Display Brightness .................................................................................20
Display Rotation .............................................................................................................20
The DISP/BACK Button ............................................................................................... 21
The Dual Display ............................................................................................................ 22
xii
Customizing the Standard Display .....................................................................23
Virtual Horizon ................................................................................................................25
The Secondary LCD Monitor ..................................................................................26
Using the Menus ..............................................................................................28
The Menus .........................................................................................................................28
Selecting a Menu Tab .................................................................................................30
Touch Screen Mode .........................................................................................31
Shooting Touch Controls .........................................................................................31
Playback Touch Controls ...........................................................................................36
2
First Steps 37
First Steps 37
Attaching the Strap .........................................................................................38
Attaching a Lens ............................................................................................... 39
Inserting the Battery ....................................................................................... 40
Inserting Memory Cards ................................................................................42
Using Two Cards ............................................................................................................ 44
Compatible Memory Cards ....................................................................................45
Charging the Battery ......................................................................................46
Turning the Camera On and O ................................................................. 50
Checking the Battery Level ...........................................................................51
Basic Setup .........................................................................................................52
Choosing a Di erent Language ...........................................................................54
Changing the Time and Date ................................................................................ 54
3
Basic Photography and Playback 55
Basic Photography and Playback 55
Taking Photographs (Mode P) .....................................................................56
Viewing Pictures ............................................................................................... 59
HDMI Output ...................................................................................................................60
Deleting Pictures ..............................................................................................62
4
Movie Recording and Playback 63
Movie Recording and Playback 63
Recording Movies ............................................................................................64
Recording Movies .........................................................................................................64
Adjusting Movie Settings .........................................................................................68
Viewing Movies .................................................................................................69
xiii
Table of Contents
5
Taking Photographs 71
Taking Photographs 71
P, S, A, and M Modes ........................................................................................ 72
Mode P: Program AE ................................................................................................... 72
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE.....................................................................................74
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ................................................................................ 76
Mode M: Manual Exposure .....................................................................................78
FILTER .................................................................................................................................... 82
Custom Modes ...............................................................................................................83
Autofocus ............................................................................................................91
Focus Mode ......................................................................................................................92
Autofocus Options (AF Mode) .............................................................................. 94
Focus-Point Selection .................................................................................................96
Manual Focus ...................................................................................................100
Checking Focus ........................................................................................................... 102
Sensitivity ..........................................................................................................105
AUTO .................................................................................................................................. 106
Metering ............................................................................................................107
Exposure Compensation .............................................................................108
Focus/Exposure Lock ....................................................................................109
Other Controls ............................................................................................................. 110
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode).........................................................111
Bracketing .........................................................................................................113
W ISO BKT ..................................................................................................................... 114
V WHITE BALANCE BKT .......................................................................................114
s Bracketing ............................................................................................................... 115
HDR .....................................................................................................................118
Panoramas ........................................................................................................120
Multiple Exposures ........................................................................................123
6
The Shooting Menus 125
The Shooting Menus 125
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) .....................................126
IMAGE SIZE ..................................................................................................................... 126
IMAGE QUALITY .......................................................................................................... 127
RAW RECORDING ....................................................................................................... 128
SELECT JPEG/HEIF ...................................................................................................... 129
FILM SIMULATION ...................................................................................................... 130
xiv
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .................................................................................. 132
GRAIN EFFECT .............................................................................................................. 132
COLOR CHROME EFFECT ....................................................................................... 133
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE .....................................................................................133
WHITE BALANCE ......................................................................................................... 134
DYNAMIC RANGE ....................................................................................................... 138
D RANGE PRIORITY .................................................................................................... 138
TONE CURVE.................................................................................................................. 139
COLOR ............................................................................................................................... 139
SHARPNESS .................................................................................................................... 139
HIGH ISO NR .................................................................................................................. 140
CLARIT Y ............................................................................................................................140
LONG EXPOSURE NR ................................................................................................ 140
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ....................................................................... 141
COLOR SPACE ............................................................................................................... 141
PIXEL MAPPING ........................................................................................................... 141
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ..................................................................... 142
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................... 142
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING ........................................................................ 142
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 143
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................146
FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................. 146
FOCUS MODE ............................................................................................................... 146
AF MODE ......................................................................................................................... 146
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 147
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................. 151
AF POINT DISPLAY yz ...................................................................................... 151
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS ................................................................................151
PRE-AF ............................................................................................................................... 152
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 152
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................. 153
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 155
AF+MF .............................................................................................................................. 157
MF ASSIST ....................................................................................................................... 158
FOCUS CHECK .............................................................................................................. 158
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA .............................................................. 159
xv
Table of Contents
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 159
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE ........................................................................... 159
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ................................................................................... 160
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 161
TOUCH SCREEN MODE ........................................................................................... 162
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) ................................................164
FILTER SETTING ............................................................................................................ 164
SPORTS FINDER MODE ........................................................................................... 164
PRE-SHOT sJ .......................................................................................................... 165
SELF-TIMER ..................................................................................................................... 166
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING .................................................................................... 167
SELF-TIMER LAMP ....................................................................................................... 167
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING ................................................................................ 168
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING ........................ 169
AE BKT SETTING .......................................................................................................... 170
FILM SIMULATION BKT ............................................................................................ 170
FOCUS BKT SETTING ................................................................................................ 170
PHOTOME TRY ............................................................................................................... 170
SHUTTER TYPE .............................................................................................................. 171
FLICKER REDUCTION ................................................................................................ 172
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING ..................................................................................... 172
IS MODE ........................................................................................................................... 173
ISO ....................................................................................................................................... 173
xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 173
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 174
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................175
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................. 175
RED EYE REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 175
TTL-LOCK MODE ......................................................................................................... 176
LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................. 176
COMMANDER SETTING .......................................................................................... 177
CH SETTING ................................................................................................................... 177
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................178
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 178
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 178
MEDIA REC SETTING ................................................................................................. 178
xvi
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 178
F IS MODE BOOST ................................................................................................... 178
AUDIO SETTING ........................................................................................................... 179
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................182
MOVIE SETTING LIST ................................................................................................. 182
SHOOTING MODE ...................................................................................................... 182
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 183
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 184
MEDIA REC SETTING ................................................................................................. 185
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING ......................................................................................... 189
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION .................................................................. 190
F-Log/HLG RECORDING ......................................................................................... 191
DATA LEVEL SETTING ............................................................................................... 192
F PHOTOMETRY ....................................................................................................... 192
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING .............................................................................. 192
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 193
F IS MODE BOOST ................................................................................................... 193
F ISO ................................................................................................................................ 194
ZEBRA SETTING ........................................................................................................... 194
ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................. 194
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ................................................................ 195
TALLY LIGHT ................................................................................................................... 195
xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 196
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ...................................................................... 196
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................ 196
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING ........................................................................ 196
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 196
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) ......................................197
F FILM SIMULATION ............................................................................................... 197
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .......................................................................... 197
F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................. 198
F DYNAMIC RANGE ................................................................................................ 198
F TONE CUR VE .......................................................................................................... 198
F COLOR ........................................................................................................................ 198
F SHARPNESS ............................................................................................................. 199
F HIGH ISO NR ........................................................................................................... 199
xvii
Table of Contents
INTERFRAME NR .......................................................................................................... 199
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................. 200
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 200
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................201
F FOCUS AREA .......................................................................................................... 201
F FOCUS MODE ........................................................................................................ 201
F AF MODE .................................................................................................................. 202
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................. 202
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 203
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................... 203
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 203
F AF+MF ....................................................................................................................... 203
F MF ASSIST ................................................................................................................ 204
F FOCUS CHECK ....................................................................................................... 204
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 204
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE ........................................................................... 204
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 204
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE .................................................................................... 205
FOCUS CHECK LOCK ................................................................................................ 206
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording).........................................................207
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ............................................................... 207
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT .............................................................. 207
MIC JACK SETTING ..................................................................................................... 208
MIC LEVEL LIMITER .................................................................................................... 208
WIND FILTER .................................................................................................................. 208
LOW CUT FILTER .......................................................................................................... 208
HEADPHONES VOLUME ......................................................................................... 208
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING ................................................................................. 209
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording) ................................................210
TIME CODE DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 210
START TIME SETTING ................................................................................................ 210
COUNT UP SETTING.................................................................................................. 211
DROP FRAME ................................................................................................................ 211
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT ................................................................................... 212
xviii
7
Playback and the Playback Menu 213
Playback and the Playback Menu 213
The Playback Display ....................................................................................214
The DISP/BACK Button ............................................................................................ 215
Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................217
Playback Zoom ............................................................................................................ 218
Multi-Frame Playback .............................................................................................. 218
The Playback Menu .......................................................................................219
SWITCH SLOT ................................................................................................................ 219
RAW CONVERSION .................................................................................................... 220
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ...................................................................... 222
ERASE ................................................................................................................................. 223
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE......................................................................................... 225
CROP .................................................................................................................................. 225
RESIZE ................................................................................................................................ 226
PROTECT .......................................................................................................................... 227
IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................. 228
VOICE MEMO SETTING............................................................................................ 229
RATING .............................................................................................................................. 230
COPY .................................................................................................................................. 231
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE .............................................................. 232
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ................................................................ 234
SLIDE SHOW .................................................................................................................. 234
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST ................................................................................................ 235
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ............................................................................................... 237
instax PRINTER PRINT ............................................................................................... 238
DISP ASPECT.................................................................................................................. 239
8
Network/USB Setting Menus 241
Network/USB Setting Menus 241
Network/USB Setting Menus .....................................................................242
9
The Setup Menus 243
The Setup Menus 243
USER SETTING .................................................................................................244
FORMAT ............................................................................................................................ 244
b AREA SETTING ..................................................................................................... 245
DATE/TIME ...................................................................................................................... 245
TIME DIFFERENCE ....................................................................................................... 246
xix
Table of Contents
Qa ............................................................................................................... 247
x MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................ 247
F MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................ 247
SENSOR CLEANING ................................................................................................... 248
BATTERY AGE ................................................................................................................ 248
RESET ................................................................................................................................. 249
REGULATORY ................................................................................................................. 249
SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................250
AF BEEP VOL. ................................................................................................................. 250
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. ............................................................................................. 250
OPERATION VOL. ......................................................................................................... 251
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ........................................................ 251
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND .......................................................... 251
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ............................................................... 252
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND ................................................................. 252
PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................. 252
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK ............................................................................................. 253
SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................254
VIEW MODE SETTING ............................................................................................... 254
EVF BRIGHTNESS ......................................................................................................... 254
EVF COLOR ..................................................................................................................... 254
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................... 255
LCD BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................ 256
LCD COLOR .................................................................................................................... 256
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................... 256
IMAGE DISP. .................................................................................................................... 257
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS .......................................................................................... 257
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ........................................................... 258
NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................. 258
F-Log VIEW ASSIST ..................................................................................................... 259
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING .............................................................................. 259
FRAMING GUIDELINE ............................................................................................... 260
AUTOROTATE PB .......................................................................................................... 261
FOCUS SCALE UNITS ................................................................................................ 261
APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS................................................................ 261
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING ......................................................................................... 262
xx
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING .......................................................................................... 262
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ....................................................................... 263
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ...................................................................... 263
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................. 264
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. ......................................................................... 264
LOCATION INFO ........................................................................................................... 265
SUB MONITOR SETTING ......................................................................................... 265
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR .......................................................... 266
x Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 267
F Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 267
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING ................................................................................268
FOCUS LEVER SETTING ........................................................................................... 268
x
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 269
F
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 269
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING........................................................................................ 269
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING ........................................ 269
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING .............................................................................. 269
COMMAND DIAL SETTING ................................................................................... 270
o S.S OPERATION .................................................................................................... 270
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION .............................................................................. 270
SHUTTER AF ................................................................................................................... 271
SHUTTER AE ................................................................................................................... 271
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS .......................................................................................... 271
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD ......................................................................................... 272
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING ............................................................................ 272
AE/AF-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................... 274
AWB-LOCK MODE ...................................................................................................... 274
a ISO BUTTON SETTING ...................................................................................... 275
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ...................................................................................... 276
LOCK ................................................................................................................................... 278
POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................279
AUTO POWER OFF ..................................................................................................... 279
PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................ 279
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING ..................................................................................... 280
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. ....................................................................................... 280
xxi
Table of Contents
SAVE DATA SETTING ......................................................................................281
FRAME NO. ..................................................................................................................... 281
EDIT FILE NAME ........................................................................................................... 282
x CARD SLOT SETTING ......................................................................................... 282
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) ........................................................................... 282
SELECT FOLDER ........................................................................................................... 283
COPYRIGHT INFO ........................................................................................................ 283
DEFAULT CAPTION ..................................................................................................... 284
GEOTAGGING ................................................................................................................ 284
10
Shortcuts 285
Shortcuts 285
Shortcut Options ............................................................................................286
MY MENU ..........................................................................................................287
MY MENU SETTING ................................................................................................... 287
The Quick Menu .............................................................................................289
The Quick Menu Display ........................................................................................ 289
Viewing and Changing Settings ....................................................................... 291
Editing the Quick Menu ......................................................................................... 292
Function Controls...........................................................................................295
The Function Buttons .............................................................................................. 295
Touch-Function Gestures ...................................................................................... 301
Lens Function Buttons ............................................................................................ 304
11
Peripherals and Optional Accessories 307
Peripherals and Optional Accessories 307
Lenses .................................................................................................................308
Lens Parts ........................................................................................................................ 308
Lens Care ......................................................................................................................... 309
Removing Lens Caps ............................................................................................... 309
Attaching Lens Hoods ............................................................................................ 310
Lenses with Aperture Rings ................................................................................. 311
Lenses with No Aperture Rings ......................................................................... 312
Lenses with O.I.S. Switches ................................................................................... 312
Manual Focus Lenses ............................................................................................... 313
Power Zoom Lenses ................................................................................................. 314
xxii
Table of Contents
External Flash Units .......................................................................................315
Flash Settings ................................................................................................................ 316
EF-X8 ..................................................................................................................................317
SYNC TERMINAL .......................................................................................................... 319
SHOE MOUNT FLASH ............................................................................................... 320
COMMANDER(OPTICAL) ........................................................................................ 323
Vertical Battery Grips ....................................................................................327
Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip ................................................................. 328
Inserting and Removing Batteries ................................................................... 329
Charging the Batteries ............................................................................................ 331
File Transmitters ..............................................................................................332
Attaching the File Transmitter ............................................................................ 333
Inserting and Removing Batteries ................................................................... 333
Charging the Batteries ............................................................................................ 333
Cooling Fans ....................................................................................................334
Attaching a Cooling Fan ........................................................................................ 334
Using the Fan ................................................................................................................ 336
12
Technical Notes 337
Technical Notes 337
Accessories from Fuji lm .............................................................................338
Software for Use with Your Camera .........................................................341
Smartphone Apps ..................................................................................................... 341
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX ..................................... 341
Capture One Express for Fuji lm ...................................................................... 342
Capture One for Fuji lm ........................................................................................ 342
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom) ...... 342
FUJIFILM X Acquire ................................................................................................... 342
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ....................................................................................... 343
For Your Safety ................................................................................................344
Product Care ....................................................................................................355
Cleaning the Image Sensor ........................................................................356
Firmware Updates ..........................................................................................357
Checking the Firmware Version ........................................................................ 357
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................358
Warning Messages and Displays ..............................................................365
Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................369
Speci cations ..................................................................................................370
xxiii
Supplied Accessories
The following are included with the camera:
•
NP-W235 rechargeable battery
O
For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment.
The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; be
sure to charge the battery before use (P 46).
•
AC-5VJ AC power adapter
•
Plug adapter
•
USB cable (approx. 0.6m/2ft.)
•
Body cap (comes attached to camera)
•
Shoulder strap
•
Cable protector
•
Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe)
•
Sync terminal cap (comes attached to camera)
•
File transmitter/vertical battery grip connector cover
(comes attached to camera)
•
Cooling fan connector cover (comes attached to camera)
•
Basic Manual
N
•
The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region.
•
For information on compatible computer software, see “Software for
Use with Your Camera” (P 341).
xxiv
About This Manual
This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM X-H2S
digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its
contents before proceeding.
Symbols and Conventions
The following symbols are used in this manual:
O
Information that should be read to prevent damage to the
product.
N
Additional information that may be helpful when using the
product.
P
Pages on which related information may be found.
Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations
are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simpli ed,
while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of
camera described in this manual.
Terminology
The optional SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Type B CFexpress memory
cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as “mem-
ory cards”. The electronic view nder may be referred to as the
“EVF” and the LCD monitor as the “LCD”. Smartphones and tablets
are referred to as “smartphones”.
1
Before You Begin
2
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
A
ISO button .............................................105, 295
B
WB button ..................................................7, 295
C
Fn1 button ..................................................... 295
D
Secondary LCD monitor................................26
E
Microphone ......................................................64
F
Hot shoe .........................................................316
G
Diopter adjustment control .........................13
H
Dial lock release .......................................56, 64
I
Mode dial ............................................................8
J
Strap eyelet .......................................................38
K
HDMI connector cover
L
Microphone jack cover
M
Headphone jack cover
N
Speaker .................................................... 69, 252
O
USB connector cover
P
Sync terminal ................................................319
Q
Fn3 button ..................................................... 295
R
Lens signal contacts
S
Lens release button ........................................39
T
Fn2 button ..................................................... 295
U
AF-assist illuminator...................................152
Self-timer lamp ............................................166
Tally light ........................................................195
V
Front command dial ............................ 10, 270
W
ON/OFF switch .................................................50
X
Shutter button .................................................58
Y
t (movie recording) button ............. 64, 295
Z
Hot shoe cover ..............................................316
a
Body cap ............................................................39
b
HDMI connector (Type A) .............................60
c
Microphone jack (⌀3.5mm) ........................67
d
Headphone jack (⌀3.5mm) ......................208
e
USB connector (Type-C) ...............................46
f
Hole to screw USB cable
g
Hole to screw cable protector
3
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
h
DRIVE button ......................................................9
b (delete) button ...........................................62
i
a (playback) button ...................................59
j
Eye sensor ..........................................................19
k
Electronic viewfi nder (EVF)
.....................................................14, 18, 20, 31
l
Eye cup (lockable) ...........................................13
m
VIEW MODE button .........................................18
n
Secondary monitor backlight button .......27
o
Focus stick (focus lever)...................7, 97, 268
p
AFON button .........................................110, 295
q
Rear command dial ....................10, 217, 270
r
Indicator lamp ....................................... 11, 195
Tally light ........................................................195
s
Remote release connector cover ................81
t
Memory card slot cover latch ......................42
u
Memory card slot cover (detachable)
.....................................................................6, 42
v
Battery-chamber cover latch ......................40
w
Battery-chamber cover .................................40
x
Selector buttons ................................................7
y
MENU/OK button .............................................28
z
DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 21, 215
x(Bluetooth) button
0
Q (quick menu) button ...............................289
1
AEL (exposure lock) button ..............110, 295
2
Tripod mount
3
LCD monitor .......................................12, 16, 18
Touch screen .................................31, 162, 205
4
File transmitter/vertical battery grip
connector cover ........................................328
4
1
Before You Begin
5
Remote release connector (⌀2.5mm) .......81
6
Memory card slot2
(for SD memory cards) ...............................42
7
Serial number plate..........................................6
8
Memory card slot1
(for Type B CFexpress cards) ......................42
9
Battery latch ....................................................41
-
Battery chamber .............................................40
^
Cooling fan connector cover .................... 334
\
Cooling fan connector ...............................334
$
Hole to screw cooling fan ..........................334
%
File transmitter/vertical battery grip
connector ...................................................328
5
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The Cable Protector
Attach the protector as shown to prevent accidental disconnection.
A
Slide the protector over the USB connector cover so that the cover
passes through the slot in the protector.
B
Tighten the lock screw.
C
Connect the cable and pass it through the protector as shown.
6
1
Before You Begin
The Serial Number Plate
Do not remove the serial number plate,
which provides the CMIITID, serial num-
ber, and other important information.
Serial number plate
The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable)
The memory card slot cover can be re-
moved by lowering the interior latch. Re-
move the cover for ease of access when
a camera rig is attached or in other sit-
uations that make it di cult to open or
close the cover.
7
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever)
Tilt or press the focus stick to select the fo-
cus area. The focus stick can also be used
to navigate the menus.
N
To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the cen-
ter of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS LEVER
SETTING.
The Selector
Press the selector up (e), right (h),
down (f), or left (g) to highlight items.
The up, right, down, and left buttons also
double as function buttons Fn4 through
Fn7.
The WB Button
Press the WB button to access white bal-
ance settings.
8
1
Before You Begin
The Mode Dial
To select a shooting mode, rotate the dial until
the icon for the desired mode aligns with the
index.
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
P
P
A
P (PROGRAM AE) Aperture and shutter speed can be
adjusted using program shift.
72
B
S (SHUTTER PRIORITY AE)
A (APERTURE PRIORITY AE)
M (MANUAL)
Select for full control over camera
settings, including aperture (M and A)
and/or shutter speed (M and S).
74
76
78
C
C1/C2/C3/C4/C5/C6/C7
(CUSTOM 1/2/3/4/5/6/7)
Take pictures using previously-stored
settings.
83
D
FILTER (FILTER) Take photos with fi lter eff ects. 82
E
F (MOVIE)
Record movies. 64
9
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The DRIVE Button
Pressing the DRIVE button displays drive-
mode menu, where you can choose from
the following the drive modes.
Mode
Mode
B
Single frame
J
High-speed burst
J
High-speed burst (1.25× crop)
O
Low-speed burst
W
ISO BKT
Mode
Mode
V
WHITE BALANCE BKT
BKT Bracketing
h
HDR
u
Panorama
j
Multiple Exposure
10
1
Before You Begin
The Command Dials
The rear and front command dials are used for the operations
below.
Front command dial Rear command dial
Shooting
Shooting
1
P
Choose the desired combi-
nation of shutter speed and
aperture (program shift).
Adjust exposure compensa-
tion.
S Choose a shutter speed.
A Adjust aperture.
2
M Choose a shutter speed. Adjust aperture.
2
FILTER Program shift.
Adjust exposure compensa-
tion.
Menus
Menus
Select menu tabs or page
through menus.
Highlight menu items.
Q Menu
Q Menu
Select items in the quick
menu.
Adjust settings in the quick
menu.
Playback
Playback View other pictures.
•
Zoom in or out (full-frame
playback).
•
Zoom in or out (multi-frame
playback).
1 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
2 Applies if the lens has no aperture ring or if an aperture ring with an “A” position is in the A
position.
N
The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.
11
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The Indicator Lamp
Camera status is shown by the indicator
lamp.
Indicator lamp
Indicator lamp
Camera status
Camera status
Glows green Focus locked.
Blinks green Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken.
Blinks green and
orange
•
Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for con-
fi rmation after being taken with option other than OFF
selected for D SCREEN SETTING> IMAGE DISP. (ad-
ditional pictures can be taken).
•
Camera o : Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tablet.
*
Glows orange
Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at
this time.
Blinks orange Flash charging; fl ash will not fi re when picture is taken.
Blinks red Lens or memory error.
* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload.
N
•
Warnings may also appear in the display.
•
The indicator lamp remains o while your eye is to the view nder.
•
The B MOVIE SETTING> TALLY LIGHT option can be used to
choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie re-
cording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.
12
1
Before You Begin
The LCD Monitor
You can adjust the angle of the LCD moni-
tor when framing shots, but be careful not
to trap your ngers or other objects.
O
•
Do not apply excessive force to the hinge when rotating the LCD
monitor, as this could damage the hinge.
•
Be careful that the corners of the monitor do not contact the camera
body, as this could leave marks.
N
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:
•
Touch photography (P 32)
•
Focus area selection (P 31)
•
Function selection (P 34)
•
Movie optimized control oL (P 33)
•
Playback (P 36)
13
1
Before You Begin
Parts of the Camera
The Eye Cup
To remove the eye cup, hold the buttons
on either side and slide eye cup up.
Focusing the View nder
If the indicators displayed in the view nder are blurred, put your
eye to the view nder and rotate the diopter adjustment control
until the display is in sharp focus.
To focus the view nder:
A
Lift the diopter adjustment control.
B
Rotate the control to adjust view nder focus.
C
Return the control to its original position and lock it in place.
O
Lift the control before use. Failure to observe this precaution could
cause product malfunction.
14
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed
during shooting.
O
For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Electronic View nder
3 4 UV
W
Y
X
Z
b
a
c
d
fg ehijk
lop
mnqrst
u
v
w
x
y
z
0
1
2
5
15
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(EVF).
3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.
A
Crop factor ..................................................... 190
B
IS mode
2
.........................................................173
C
Flash (TTL) mode .........................................320
D
Flash compensation ................................... 320
E
Self-timer indicator ..................................... 166
F
Continuous mode ........................................111
G
Shutter type ................................................... 171
H
AF+MF indicator
2
.......................................157
I
Bluetooth ON/OFF
J
White balance .............................................. 134
K
AWB lock ........................................................274
L
Film simulation ............................................ 130
M
F-Log/HLG recording ..................................191
N
Dynamic range ............................................138
O
D-range priority ...........................................138
P
Movie mode ...........................................64, 183
Q
High-speed recording indicator .............. 184
R
Recording time available/
elapsed recording time ..............................64
S
Card slot options ................................... 44, 282
T
Number of available frames
1
...................369
U
Image size ......................................................126
V
File format ......................................................186
W
Image quality................................................127
X
HEIF format ...................................................129
Y
Date and time ..................................52, 54, 245
Z
Touch screen mode .............................. 31, 162
a
Cooling fan settings ...........................173, 196
b
Temperature warning ......................... 43, 368
c
Control lock
3
.................................................278
d
Boost mode ...................................................280
e
Power supply ....................................................48
f
Histogram .........................................................24
g
Battery level ......................................................51
h
Sensitivity ....................................................... 105
i
Exposure compensation ............................ 108
j
Aperture ...............................................73, 76, 78
k
Distance indicator
2
..................................... 102
l
Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 78
m
TTL lock ..................................................176, 300
n
AE lock ....................................................110, 274
o
Metering ......................................................... 107
p
Shooting mode ...............................................72
q
Focus mode
2
....................................................92
r
Focus indicator
2
..............................................93
s
Manual focus indicator
2
.................... 92, 100
t
AF lock ....................................................110, 274
u
Time code .......................................................210
v
Microphone input channel ..............181, 209
w
Recording level
2
........................................... 207
x
Exposure indicator ................................ 78, 108
y
Virtual horizon .................................................25
z
Focus frame ............................................ 96, 109
0
Image transfer status
1
Location data download status ..............284
2
Movie compression .....................................186
3
Depth-of-fi eld preview ........................ 77, 102
4
Proxy setting (ProRes only) ........................ 188
5
Focus check ..........................................103, 158
16
1
Before You Begin
The LCD Monitor
A C F L M ON R STU
V
W
X
Y
Z
a
b
d
e
c
h gijm klnopst
qruvwx
y
z
1
2
3
I J P Q
7
G
D E
H
f
4
5
B
6
K
0
17
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
A
Crop factor ..................................................... 190
B
Location data download status ..............284
C
Focus check ..........................................103, 158
D
Depth-of-fi eld preview ........................ 77, 102
E
Proxy setting (ProRes only) ........................ 188
F
Movie compression .....................................186
G
Image transfer status
H
Bluetooth ON/OFF
I
Movie mode ...........................................64, 183
J
High-speed recording indicator .............. 184
K
Focus frame ............................................ 96, 109
L
Recording time available/
elapsed recording time ..............................64
M
Date and time ..................................52, 54, 245
N
Card slot options ................................... 44, 282
O
Number of available frames
1
...................369
P
Image size ......................................................126
Q
File format ......................................................186
R
Image quality................................................127
S
HEIF format ...................................................129
T
Cooling fan settings ...........................173, 196
U
Touch screen mode
3
............................ 31, 162
V
AWB lock ........................................................274
W
White balance .............................................. 134
X
Film simulation ............................................ 130
Y
F-Log/HLG recording ..................................191
Z
Dynamic range ............................................138
a
D-range priority ...........................................138
b
Movie optimized control
3
.............................33
c
Virtual horizon .................................................25
d
Boost mode ...................................................280
e
Touch zoom
3
....................................................35
f
Temperature warning ......................... 43, 368
g
Control lock
4
..................................................278
h
Battery level ......................................................51
i
Power supply ....................................................48
j
Sensitivity ....................................................... 105
k
Histogram .........................................................24
l
Exposure compensation ............................ 108
m
Distance indicator
2
..................................... 102
n
Aperture ...............................................73, 76, 78
o
Time code .......................................................210
p
Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 78
q
TTL lock ..................................................176, 300
r
AE lock ....................................................110, 274
s
Metering ......................................................... 107
t
Shooting mode ...............................................72
u
Focus mode
2
....................................................92
v
Focus indicator
2
..............................................93
w
Manual focus indicator
2
.................... 92, 100
x
AF lock ....................................................110, 274
y
Microphone input channel ..............181, 209
z
AF+MF indicator
2
.......................................157
0
Shutter type ................................................... 171
1
Recording level
2
........................................... 207
2
Continuous mode ........................................111
3
Self-timer indicator ..................................... 166
4
Exposure indicator ................................ 78, 108
5
Flash (TTL) mode .........................................320
6
Flash compensation ................................... 320
7
IS mode
2
......................................................... 173
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(LCD).
3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls.
4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.
18
1
Before You Begin
Choosing a Display Mode
Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle
through the following display modes.
You can choose separate display modes
for shooting and playback.
SHOOTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
E
E
EYE SENSOR
EYE SENSOR
Putting your eye to the viewfi nder turns the viewfi nder
on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
the viewfi nder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY
LCD ONLY LCD monitor on, viewfi nder off .
EVF ONLY
EVF ONLY Viewfi nder on, LCD monitor off .
EVF ONLY +
EVF ONLY +
E
E
Putting your eye to the viewfi nder turns the viewfi nder
on; taking it away turns the viewfi nder off . The LCD
monitor remains off .
E
E
EYE SENSOR + LCD
EYE SENSOR + LCD
IMAGE DISP.
IMAGE DISP.
Putting your eye to the viewfi nder during shooting
turns the viewfi nder on, but the LCD monitor is used for
the display of images once you remove your eye from
the viewfi nder after shooting. The options selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP> IMAGE DISP. apply to display
in the LCD monitor.
19
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
PLAYBACK
Option
Option
Description
Description
E
E
EYE SENSOR
EYE SENSOR
Putting your eye to the viewfi nder turns the viewfi nder
on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
the viewfi nder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY
LCD ONLY LCD monitor on, viewfi nder off .
EVF ONLY
EVF ONLY Viewfi nder on, LCD monitor off .
N
•
Use D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu
to choose a display mode for the EVF and LCD monitor.
•
EVF/LCD SWITCH can be assigned to a function button and the
button then used to switch between the EVF ONLY and LCD ONLY
displays.
The Eye Sensor
The eye sensor may respond to objects other
than your eye or to light shining directly on the
sensor.
Eye sensor
20
1
Before You Begin
Adjusting Display Brightness
The brightness and saturation of the view nder and LCD monitor
can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu.
Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust view nder
brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do
the same for the LCD monitor.
Display Rotation
When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE
DISPLAYS, the indicators in the view nder and LCD monitor au-
tomatically rotate to match camera orientation.
21
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators in the view nder and LCD
monitor.
N
Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be
selected separately. To choose the EVF dis-
play, place your eye to the view nder while
using the DISP/BACK button.
Viewfi nder
Full screen Standard indicators
Dual display
(manual focus mode only)
22
1
Before You Begin
LCD Monitor
Standard indicators No indicators
12800
12800
Dual display
(manual focus mode only)
Info display
The Dual Display
The dual display consists of a large full-frame window and a
smaller close-up of the focus area.
23
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
Customizing the Standard Display
To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:
1
Display standard indicators.
Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators.
2
Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING.
Select D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the
setup menu.
3
Choose items.
Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
•
FRAMING GUIDELINE
•
FOCUS FRAME
•
AF DISTANCE INDICATOR
•
MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
•
HISTOGRAM
•
LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT
•
SHOOTING MODE
•
APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO
•
INFORMATION BACKGROUND
•
Expo. Comp. (Digit)
•
Expo. Comp. (Scale)
•
FOCUS MODE
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLASH
•
CONTINUOUS MODE
•
DUAL IS MODE
•
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
BOOST MODE
•
COOLING FAN SETTING
•
FRAMES REMAINING
•
IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY
•
MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME
•
IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
•
MIC LEVEL
•
GUIDANCE MESSAGE
•
BATTERY LEVEL
•
FRAMING OUTLINE
4
Press DISP/BACK to save changes.
5
Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the
shooting display.
24
1
Before You Begin
Framing Outline
Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see
against dark backgrounds.
Histograms
Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is
shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis.
Number of pixels
Shadows Highlights
Pixel brightness
•
Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve
throughout the tone range.
•
Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of
the graph.
•
Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of
the graph.
To view separate RGB histograms and a dis-
play showing areas of the frame that will be
overexposed at current settings superimposed
on the view through the lens, press the func-
tion button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned
(P 269, 295).
A
Overexposed areas blink
B
RGB histograms
25
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
Virtual Horizon
Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be cho-
sen using D SCREEN SET-UP> ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING.
Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it on
a tripod or the like.
2D 3D
Pitch Roll
•
OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed.
•
2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted
left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level.
The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back.
•
3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or
right and forward or back.
N
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button
and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays.
26
1
Before You Begin
The Secondary LCD Monitor
Among the settings that can be viewed
in the secondary LCD monitor are shutter
speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity. Dif-
ferent settings are displayed in still pho-
tography and movie modes.
Secondary LCD monitor
Default Settings
By default, the secondary LCD monitor displays the settings list-
ed below.
N
The settings displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP>
SUB MONITOR SETTING.
Still Photography Mode
Still Photography Mode
Default
Default
A
SHUTTER SPEED
E
FILM SIMULATION
B
APERTURE
F
WHITE BALANCE
C
EXPO. COMP.
G
IMAGE SIZE
D
ISO
H
SHOOTING MODE
27
1
Before You Begin
Camera Displays
Movie Mode
Movie Mode
Default
Default
A
MOVIE MODE
E
FILM SIMULATION
B
REC. TIME
F
WHITE BALANCE
C
EXPO. COMP.
G
CARD SLOT OPTIONS
D
ISO
H
BATTERY LEVEL
The Secondary Monitor Backlight Button
To turn on the secondary LCD monitor back-
light when you nd the secondary LCD monitor
too dark to read, press the secondary monitor
backlight button. Press the button again to turn
the backlight o .
Background Color
The background color (black or white) for the secondary LCD monitor can
be selected using the D SCREEN SET-UP> SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND
COLOR option in the D(setup) menu. Note that the background is dis-
played in white whenever the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on.
28
1
Before You Begin
Using the Menus
To display the menus, press MENU/OK.
The Menus
Di erent menus are displayed during still photography, movie
recording, and playback.
Still Photography (All Modes Except F)
Pressing MENU/OK during still photography displays the photo
menus.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
EXIT
N
In modes C1 through C7, photo menus will be displayed if x STILL
is selected for the chosen bank using either H IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING
> xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the photo menus or
B MOVIE SETTING
> xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the movie
menus (P 83).
29
1
Before You Begin
Using the Menus
Movie Recording (F/Movie Mode)
Pressing MENU/OK in movie mode displays the movie menus.
MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
SHOOTING MODE
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
MEDIA REC SETTING
EXIT
N
In modes C1 through C7, photo menus will be displayed if F MOVIE
is selected for the chosen bank using either H IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING
> xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the photo menus or
B MOVIE SETTING
> xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the movie
menus (P 83).
Playback
Pressing MENU/OK during playback displays the playback menu.
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
SWITCH SLOT
PLAY BACK MENU
RAW CONVERSION
ERASE
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
CROP
RESIZE
EXIT
PROTECT
30
1
Before You Begin
Using the Menus
Selecting a Menu Tab
To navigate the menus:
1
Press MENU/OK to display the menus.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
EXIT
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever)
left to highlight the tab for the cur-
rent menu.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
EXIT
Tab
3
Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab contain-
ing the desired item.
4
Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu.
N
Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through
menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items.
31
1
Before You Begin
Touch Screen Mode
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen.
Shooting Touch Controls
To enable touch controls, select ON for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING> x TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING.
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
TOUCH ZOOM
DOUBLE TAP SETTING
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGS
TOUCH FUNCTION
EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
ON
OFF
EVF
The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pic-
tures are being framed in the electronic view nder (EVF). Use
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> EVF
TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the mon-
itor employed for touch controls.
N
•
When FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING>
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, you can choose the face used
for focus.
•
You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferential-
ly focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF
SETTING> SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.
32
1
Before You Begin
LCD Monitor
The operation performed can be selected
by tapping the touch screen mode indica-
tor in the display. Touch controls can be
used for the following operations:
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
TOUCH
TOUCH
SHOOTING
SHOOTING
Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your fi nger
on the display.
AF
AF
AFOFF
AFOFF
•
If SINGLE AF is selected for focus mode, the camera will fo-
cus when you tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at
the current distance until you tap the AFOFF icon.
•
If CONTINUOUS AF is selected for focus mode, the camera
will initiate focus when you tap your subject in the display.
The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the
distance to the subject until you tap the AFOFF icon.
•
When MANUAL FOCUS is selected for focus mode, you can
tap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus.
AREA
AREA
Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.
OFF
OFF
Touch screen mode off .
O
•
The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
•
Di erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 163).
N
•
To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, se-
lect OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH SCREEN SETTING>
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
•
Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING> TOUCH
SCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls available during mov-
ie recording, see “Movie Recording (FTOUCH SCREEN MODE; P 205)”.
33
1
Before You Begin
Touch Screen Mode
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING>
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL or
tapping the movie-optimized mode but-
ton in the shooting display optimizes the
command dials and touch controls for
movie recording. This can be used to pre-
vent camera sounds being recorded with
movie footage.
Movie-optimized
mode button
•
SHUTTER SPEED
•
APERTURE
•
EXPOSURE COMPENSATION
•
ISO
•
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
•
WIND FILTER
•
HEADPHONES VOLUME
•
F FILM SIMULATION
•
F WHITE BALANCE
•
F IS MODE
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
F FOCUS MODE
N
•
Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring.
•
When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized mode
button can be used to change shooting settings or disable movie-opti-
mized control.
34
1
Before You Begin
Touch Function
Functions can be assigned to the follow-
ing ick gestures in much the same way
as function buttons (P 295):
•
Flick up: T-Fn1
•
Flick left: T-Fn2
•
Flick right: T-Fn3
•
Flick down: T-Fn4
N
•
In some cases, touch-function ick ges-
tures display a menu; tap to select the
desired option.
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
SET CANCEL
•
Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable
touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING> c TOUCH FUNCTION.
35
1
Before You Begin
Touch Screen Mode
Touch Zoom
If the lens supports touch zoom, you can
zoom in and out by touching the display.
Tap the touch zoom button in the display
to enable touch zoom.
Touch zoom is controlled using the but-
tons in the display.
Button
Button
Description
Description
Touch zoom
Touch zoom Enable touch zoom.
Zoom in
Zoom in
Zoom in or out. Touch and hold to zoom in or out at a constant
speed.
Zoom out
Zoom out
Rocker switch
Rocker switch
The camera zooms in or out at a speed corresponding to the
position of the rocker switch.
Disable
Disable Disable touch zoom.
N
The rate at which the camera zooms in and out in response to the
T and Wbuttons can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING> CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (Fn).
36
1
Before You Begin
Touch Screen Mode
Playback Touch Controls
When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING> a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls
can be used for the following playback operations:
•
Swipe: Swipe a nger across the display to
view other images.
•
Pinch-out: Place two ngers on the display
and spread them apart to zoom in.
•
Pinch-in: Place two ngers on the display
and slide them together to zoom out.
N
Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no
further.
•
Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in
on the focus point.
•
Drag: View other areas of the image during
playback zoom.
37
First Steps
38
2
First Steps
Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
Attach the strap to the two strap eyelets as shown below.
O
To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured.
39
2
First Steps
Attaching a Lens
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
Remove the body cap from the camera
and the rear cap from the lens. Place the
lens on mount, keeping the marks on the
lens and camera aligned (
A
), and then
rotate the lens until it clicks into place
(
B
).
O
•
When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does
not enter the camera.
•
Be careful not to touch the camera’s internal parts.
•
Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place.
•
Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens.
Removing Lenses
To remove the lens, turn the camera o , then
press the lens release button (
A
) and rotate
the lens as shown (
B
).
O
To prevent dust accumulating on the lens
or inside the camera, replace the lens caps
and camera body cap when the lens is not
attached.
Lenses and Other Optional Accessories
The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
O
Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (ex-
changing) lenses.
•
Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter.
•
Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright light
source. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it to
malfunction.
•
Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses.
•
See the manual provided with the lens for information on use.
40
2
First Steps
Inserting the Battery
Insert the battery in the camera as described below.
1
Open the battery-chamber cover.
Slide the battery-chamber cover
latch as shown and open the bat-
tery-chamber cover.
O
•
Do not open the battery-chamber
cover when the camera is on. Fail-
ure to observe this precaution could
damage image les or memory
cards.
•
Do not use excessive force when
handling the battery-chamber cover.
2
Insert the battery as shown.
O
•
Insert the battery in the orientation
shown. Do not use force or attempt
to insert the battery upside down or
backwards.
•
Con rm that the battery is securely
latched.
41
2
First Steps
Inserting the Battery
3
Close the battery-chamber cover.
Close and latch the cover.
O
If the cover does not close, check that
the battery is in the correct orienta-
tion. Do not attempt to force the cov-
er shut.
Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera o and open the battery-cham-
ber cover.
To remove the battery, press the battery latch
to the side, and slide the battery out of the
camera as shown.
O
The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environ-
ments. Observe caution when removing the battery.
42
2
First Steps
Inserting Memory Cards
Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately).
N
The camera is equipped with two memory card slots. Use Slot 1 with
CFexpress cards and Slot 2 with SD, SDHC, or SDXC cards.
1
Open the memory card slot cover.
Unlatch and open the cover.
O
Do not turn the camera o or remove the memory card while the
memory card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or de-
leted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could dam-
age the card.
2
Insert the memory card.
Holding the card in the orientation
shown, slide it in until it clicks into
place at the back of the slot. Close
and latch the memory card slot cover.
O
Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle
or use force.
43
2
First Steps
Inserting Memory Cards
Removing Memory Cards
Turn the camera o and open the memory card
slot cover. Eject the card by pressing it in with a
nger and then slowly releasing it; the card can
then be removed by hand.
O
•
Press the center of the card.
•
Suddenly removing your nger from the card could cause the card to
fall from the slot. Remove your nger slowly.
•
If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to the
touch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it.
44
2
First Steps
Using Two Cards
The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two
slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the sec-
ond slot only when the card in the rst slot is full. This can be
changed using D SAVE DATA SET-UP> x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Option
Option
Description
Description
Display
Display
SEQUENTIAL
(default)
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in
the fi rst slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVE
DATA SET-UP> SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL),
recording will start on the card in the second slot and
switch to the fi rst slot when the card in the second slot
is full.
BACKUP Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
SEPARATE
RAW pictures are recorded to the card in the fi rst slot
and JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot.
This setting takes eff ect only when FINE + RAW or
NORMAL+ RAW is selected for H
IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING> IMAGE QUALITY.
RAW+JPEG
RAW+HEIF
The card used to store movies can be selected using B MOVIE
SETTING> MEDIA REC SETTING.
45
2
First Steps
Inserting Memory Cards
Compatible Memory Cards
•
The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, SDXC, and CFexpress
Type B memory cards. Both the UHS-I and UHS-II bus interfaces
are supported.
•
CFexpress or UHS-II memory cards are recommended for high-
speed burst photography.
•
The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary
with the settings selected (P 68).
•
A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fuji lm
website. For details, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/
.
O
•
Do not turn the camera o or remove the memory card while the memo-
ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from
the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
•
Memory cards can be locked, making it
impossible to format the card or to record
or delete images. Before inserting a mem-
ory card, slide the write-protect switch to
the unlocked position.
•
Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach of
children. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance
immediately.
•
miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory
cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the cam-
era to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove
the card.
•
Do not a x labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels
can cause camera malfunction.
•
Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card.
•
Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which
pictures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a com-
puter or other device to edit, delete, or rename image les. Always
use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming les,
copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not the
originals. Renaming the les on the camera can cause problems
during playback.
46
2
First Steps
Charging the Battery
For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at ship-
ment. The camera will not function if the battery is not
charged; be sure to charge the battery before use. Before
charging the battery, turn the camera o .
O
•
An NP-W235 rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera.
•
Charging takes about 180minutes.
1
Attach the plug adapter to the AC power adapter.
Attach the plug adapter as shown, making
sure that it is fully inserted and clicks into
place on the AC power adapter terminals.
O
•
The supplied plug adapter is for use exclu-
sively with the AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
Do not use it with other devices.
•
The shape of the plug adapter varies with
the country of sale.
2
Charge the battery.
Connect the camera to the supplied AC power adapter using
the supplied USB cable. Then plug the AC power adapter into
an indoor power outlet.
O
•
Connect the cable to the camera’s USB connector (Type-C).
•
Be sure the connectors are fully inserted.
47
2
First Steps
Charging the Battery
Charge Status
The indicator lamp shows battery charge status
as follows:
Indicator lamp
Indicator lamp
Battery status
Battery status
On Battery charging
Off Charging complete
Blinks Charging error
48
2
First Steps
O
•
The supplied AC power adapter is compatible with power supplies of
100 to 240 V (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use).
•
Do not use the AC power adapter or USB cable with other devices, as
this could cause malfunction.
•
Do not a x labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe
this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from
the camera.
•
Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat.
•
Read the cautions in “The Battery and Power Supply”.
•
Use only genuine Fuji lm rechargeable batteries designated for use
in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in prod-
uct malfunction.
•
Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel
the outer casing.
•
The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the
battery one or two days before use.
•
If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its
charging life and must be replaced.
•
Unplug the AC power adapter from the power outlet when it is not
in use.
•
If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may nd
that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge
the battery regularly.
•
Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure
to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging.
•
Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures.
•
Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> Bluetooth
ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu increases the drain on
the battery.
N
•
If the camera is turned on during charging,
charging will end and the USB connection
will instead be used to power the camera.
The battery level will begin to gradually
decline.
•
The camera will display a “power supply” icon when powered via USB.
49
2
First Steps
Charging the Battery
Charging via Computer
The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with com-
puters with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface.
Leave the computer on during charging.
O
•
The battery will not charge while the camera is on.
•
Connect the supplied USB cable.
•
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub
or keyboard.
•
Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume
charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the
USB cable.
•
Charging may not be supported depending on the model of com-
puter, computer settings, and the computer’s current state.
•
The battery takes about 600 minutes to charge with a charging input
of 5 V/500 mA.
50
2
First Steps
Turning the Camera On and O
Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and o .
Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera
on, or to OFF to turn the camera o .
O
Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or view nder can a ect pic-
tures or the view through the view nder. Keep the lens and view nder
clean.
N
•
Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback.
•
Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
•
The camera will turn o automatically if no operations are performed
for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT>
AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned o
automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF
switch to OFF and then back to ON.
51
2
First Steps
Checking the Battery Level
After turning the camera on, check the battery level in the
display.
Battery level is shown as follows:
Indicator
Indicator
Description
Description
e
Battery partially discharged.
f
Battery about 80% full.
g
Battery about 60% full.
h
Battery about 40% full.
i
Battery about 20% full.
i
(red)
Low battery. Charge as soon as possible.
j
(blinks red)
Battery exhausted. Turn camera off and recharge battery.
52
2
First Steps
Basic Setup
When you turn the camera on for the rst time, you can
choose a language and set the camera clock. Follow the
steps below when turning the camera on for the rst time.
1
Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be
displayed.
2
Choose a language.
Highlight a language and press
MENU/OK.
3
Choose a time zone.
When prompted, choose a time zone
and turn daylight savings time on
or o using the focus stick (focus le-
ver), then highlight SET and press
MENU/OK.
OFF
GMT ±0:00
SET
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
AREA SETTING
BERLIN/PARIS
AREA SETTING
NO
N
To skip this step, press DISP/BACK.
53
2
First Steps
Basic Setup
4
Set the clock.
..
BERLIN/PARIS
GMT +1:00
2022 31 12 12hAM12 00
NO
SET
DATE/TIME
5
View information on the smartphone app.
•
The camera will display a QR code
you can scan with your smartphone
to open a website where you can
download the smartphone app.
•
Press MENU/OK to exit to the shoot-
ing display.
SET
APPLICATION
IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED
TO THE SMARTPHONE.
SCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP.
N
Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera
or control the camera remotely.
6
Format the memory card (P 244).
O
Format memory cards before rst use, and be sure to reformat all
memory cards after using them in a computer or other device.
N
If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will
be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the
camera is turned on.
54
2
First Steps
Basic Setup
Choosing a Di erent Language
To change the language:
1
Display language options.
Select D USER SETTING> Qa.
2
Choose a language.
Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
Changing the Time and Date
To set the camera clock:
1
Display DATE/TIME options.
Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME.
2
Set the clock.
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the
year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to
change. Press MENU/OK to set the clock.
55
Basic Photography and
Playback
56
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
This section describes how to take pictures using program
AE (mode P). See pages 72–81 for information on S, A,
and M modes.
1
Rotate the mode dial to P.
O
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to
release the dial.
2
Con rm that P appears in the display.
57
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
3
Ready the camera.
•
Hold the camera steady with both
hands and brace your elbows
against your sides. Shaking or un-
steady hands can blur your shots.
•
To prevent pictures that are out of
focus or too dark (underexposed),
keep your ngers and other objects
away from the lens and AF-assist
illuminator.
4
Frame the picture.
Lenses with Zoom Rings
Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in
the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom
out, right to zoom in.
A
58
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
5
Focus.
Press the shutter button halfway to
set focus and exposure.
Focus indicator
Focus frame
•
If the camera is able to focus, the focus frame and focus indicator
will glow green.
•
If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s
will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white.
N
•
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light to
assist the focus operation.
•
Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is
pressed halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the
button is kept in this position (AF/AE lock).
•
The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macro
and standard focus ranges for the lens.
6
Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down
to take the picture.
59
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Viewing Pictures
Pictures can be viewed in the view nder or LCD monitor.
To view pictures full frame, press a.
100-0001
Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (fo-
cus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Press
the focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order
recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus
stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame.
N
Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (“gift image”)
icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playback
zoom may not be available.
Two Memory Cards
If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button
to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAY
BACK MENU> SWITCH SLOT option.
60
3
Basic Photography and Playback
HDMI Output
Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI
devices.
Connecting to HDMI Devices
Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using a
third-party HDMI cable.
1
Turn the camera o .
2
Connect the cable as shown below.
Insert into
HDMI connector
Insert into HDMI
connector (Type A)
3
Con gure the device for HDMI input as described in the doc-
umentation supplied with the device.
4
Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will
be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns o
in playback mode (P 61).
O
•
Making sure the connectors are fully inserted.
•
Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5m (4.9ft.) long.
61
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
Shooting
Display live view or movie footage on a TV or save it to an exter-
nal recorder that supports HDMI input.
Playback
To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera mon-
itor turns o and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI
device. Note that the camera volume controls have no e ect on
sounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls to
adjust the volume.
N
Some televisions may brie y display a black screen when movie play-
back begins.
62
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Deleting Pictures
Use the b button to delete pictures.
O
Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
1
With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and
select FRAME.
FRAME
SELECTED FRAMES
ALL FRAMES
ERASE
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through
pictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a con rmation dialog is
not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures.
N
•
Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any
pictures you wish to delete (P 227).
•
Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK
MENU> ERASE option (P 223).
63
Movie Recording and
Playback
64
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Recording Movies
Record movies with sound.
Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded by pressing the t (movie recording)
button or rotating the mode dial to F(movie).
The t(Movie Recording) Button
Use the t(movie recording) button to quickly and easily record
movies while in still photography mode.
N
The camera automatically selects CONTINUOUS AF for focus mode.
1
Press t to start recording.
•
A recording indicator (V) is dis-
played while recording is in prog-
ress.
•
The time remaining is shown by a
countdown display, while another
display counts up to show the re-
cording time.
Recording time
Time remaining
2
Press t again to end recording.
Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is
reached or the memory card is full.
65
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Recording Movies
F(Movie) Mode
For more control over camera settings, rotate the mode dial to
F(movie) and record movies using the shutter button.
1
Rotate the mode dial to F(movie).
O
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to
release the dial.
2
Press the shutter button to start recording.
•
A recording indicator (V) is dis-
played while recording is in prog-
ress.
•
The time remaining is shown by a
countdown display, while another
display counts up to show the re-
cording time.
Recording time
Time remaining
3
Press the shutter button again to end recording.
Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is
reached or the memory card is full.
66
4
Movie Recording and Playback
O
•
Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external
microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording.
•
Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds
made by the camera during recording.
•
Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very
bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
N
•
The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIE
SETTING> TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp—
indicator or AF-assist—that lights during movie recording and
whether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you
can change exposure compensation by up to ±2EV and adjust zoom
using the zoom ring on the lens (if available).
•
While recording is in progress, you can:
-
Adjust sensitivity
-
Refocus using any of the following methods:
•
Press the shutter button halfway
•
Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned
•
Use touch screen controls
-
Display a histogram or arti cial horizon by pressing the button to
which HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been as-
signed
•
Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases
settings may not apply during recording.
•
To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF
SETTING> FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) and
rear command dial (P 96).
67
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Recording Movies
Temperature Warnings
The camera automatically turns o to protect itself when its temperature or
the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed,
image noise may increase. Turn the camera o and wait for it to cool before
turning it on again.
Using an External Microphone
Sound can be recorded with external micro-
phones that connect using jacks 3.5 mm in
diameter; microphones that require plug-in
power cannot be used. See the microphone
manual for details.
XLR Microphone Adapters
The camera can be used with TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F XLR microphone
adapters. For more information, visit the TASCAM website.
https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website
68
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Recording Movies
Adjusting Movie Settings
Movie settings can be adjusted from the movie menus or using
the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus (P 28).
•
Use the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus to quick-
ly adjust settings when recording movies via the t(movie re-
cording) button (P 178).
•
The movie menus contain options for use when recording mov-
ies via the shutter button in F(movie) mode (P 182).
•
Settings such as frame rate and frame size can be adjusted us-
ing MOVIE MODE.
•
Use MEDIA REC SETTING for such tasks as choosing the le
type, bit rate, and the destination card slot.
•
Focus mode is selected using G AF/MF SETTING> F FOCUS
MODE in the movie menus. Regardless of the option selected,
the camera will automatically switch to CONTINUOUS AF when
FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is chosen
for G AF/MF SETTING> g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
or SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. Note, however, that choos-
ing MANUAL FOCUS when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT
DETECTION ON is selected disables face and subject detection.
O
•
Changes made using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus
also apply to the movie menus. Changes made in one set of menus auto-
matically apply in the other.
•
The type of memory card supported varies with the option select for
B MOVIE SETTING> MEDIA REC SETTING.
-
Record ProRes movies to CFexpress cards.
-
Movies with a bit rate of 720 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards
or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V90 or better.
-
Movies with a bit rate of 360 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards
or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V60 or better.
-
Movies with a bit rate of 100 or 200 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress
cards or to cards with a UHS Speed Class of 3 or better.
Depth of Field
Choose low f-numbers to soften background details. Aperture can be ad-
justed when A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual) is selected for B MOVIE
SETTING> SHOOTING MODE.
69
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Viewing Movies
View movies on the camera.
In full-frame playback, movies are identi-
ed by a W icon. Press the focus stick (fo-
cus lever) down to start movie playback.
AUDIO SET.PLAY
The following operations can be per-
formed while a movie is displayed:
Focus stick
Focus stick
(focus lever)
(focus lever)
Full-frame playback
Full-frame playback
Playback in
Playback in
progress (
progress (
x
x
)
)
Playback
Playback
paused (
paused (
y
y
)
)
Up
View photo
information
End playback
Down Start playback Pause playback Start/resume playback
Left/right
View other pictures
Adjust speed
Single frame rewind/
advance
Progress is shown in the display during
playback.
O
Do not cover the speaker during playback.
29m59s
PAUSESTOP
N
•
Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press the
focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press MENU/OK
again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND
SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME.
•
To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the cam-
era monitor, press the a button (P 60).
70
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Viewing Movies
Playback Speed
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to
adjust playback speed during playback. Speed
is shown by the number of arrows (M or N).
29m59s
Arrows
71
Taking Photographs
72
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control
over shutter speed and aperture.
Mode P: Program AE
Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be
selected with program shift.
Rotate the mode dial to P.
P will appear in the display.
O
•
If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed and aperture displays will show “– – –”.
•
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-
lease the dial.
73
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Program Shift
If desired, you can rotate the front command
dial to select other combinations of shutter
speed and aperture without altering exposure
(program shift).
Aperture
Shutter speed
O
Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:
•
When TTL is selected for F FLASH SETTING > FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING
•
When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING>
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
In movie mode
N
To cancel program shift, turn the camera o .
74
5
Taking Photographs
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE
Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for
optimal exposure.
1
Rotate the mode dial to S.
S will appear in the display.
2
Rotate the front command dial to
choose a shutter speed.
N
The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
O
•
If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter
speed, aperture will be displayed in red.
•
If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aper-
ture display will show “– – –”.
•
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-
lease the dial.
75
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
N
•
Shutter speed can be adjusted while the AFON button is pressed or
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
•
At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be
displayed while the exposure is in progress.
•
To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
•
The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a long
time-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended.
76
5
Taking Photographs
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE
Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for
optimal exposure.
1
Rotate the mode dial to A.
A will appear in the display.
2
Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture.
N
•
If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring or if the aperture
ring is in the A position, aperture can be adjusted by rotating the
front command dial.
•
The roles played by the front command dial can be changed us-
ing D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
O
•
If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture,
shutter speed will be displayed in red.
•
If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed display will show “– – –”.
•
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to re-
lease the dial.
N
Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
77
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Previewing Depth of Field
When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned
to a function button, pressing the button dis-
plays a L icon and stops aperture down to the
selected setting, allowing depth of eld to be
previewed in the display.
78
5
Taking Photographs
Mode M: Manual Exposure
In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed
(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative ex-
pression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shut-
ter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached.
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.
M will appear in the display.
79
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
2
Rotate the rear command dial to
choose a shutter speed and the lens
aperture ring to choose an aperture.
N
•
The manual exposure display includes an exposure indicator
that shows the amount the picture would be under- or over-ex-
posed at current settings.
•
If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring or if the aperture
ring is in the A position, aperture can be adjusted by rotating the
front command dial.
•
The roles played by the front and rear command dials can be
changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL
SETTING.
O
Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release
the dial.
BULB
Select a shutter speed of BULB for long time-exposures in which
you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod is rec-
ommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure.
1
Set shutter speed to BULB.
80
5
Taking Photographs
2
Press the shutter button all the way down.
•
The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the
shutter button is pressed.
•
The display shows the time elapsed since the exposure
started.
•
Releasing the shutter button closes the shutter, ending the
exposure. Processing will begin, and the camera will display
the processing time remaining.
O
Bulb photography is not available in drive modes other than STILL
IMAGE or when the electronic shutter is selected for A SHOOTING
SETTING> SHUTTER TYPE.
N
•
Selecting an aperture of A xes shutter speed at 30 s.
•
To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
81
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Using a Remote Release
A remote release can be used for long time-ex-
posures. When using an optional RR-100 remote
release or an electronic release from third-party
suppliers, connect it to the camera’s remote re-
lease connector.
Exposure Preview
To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select PREVIEW EXP./WB for
D SCREEN SET-UP> PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE.
N
Select an option other than PREVIEW EXP./WB when using the ash
or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the pic-
ture is taken.
82
5
Taking Photographs
FILTER
Take photos with lter e ects.
1
Rotate the mode dial to FILTER.
2
Choose a lter via A SHOOTING SETTING> FILTER SETTING.
Filter
Filter
Description
Description
G TOY CAMERA
Choose for a retro toy camera eff ect.
H MINIATURE
The tops and bottoms of pictures are blurred for
a diorama eff ect.
I POP COLOR
Create high-contrast images with saturated
colors.
J HIGH-KEY
Create bright, low-contrast images.
Z LOW-KEY
Create uniformly dark tones with few areas of
emphasized highlights.
K DYNAMIC TONE
Dynamic tone expression is used for a fantasy
eff ect.
X SOFT FOCUS
Create a look that is evenly soft throughout the
whole image.
u PARTIAL COLOR (RED)
Areas of the image that are the selected color
are recorded in that color. All other areas of the
image are recorded in black-and-white.
v PARTIAL COLOR (ORANGE)
w PARTIAL COLOR (YELLOW)
x PARTIAL COLOR (GREEN)
y PARTIAL COLOR (BLUE)
z PARTIAL COLOR (PURPLE)
O
Depending on the subject and camera settings, images may in
some cases be grainy or vary in brightness or hue.
83
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Custom Modes
Rotate the mode dial to any of modes
C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C7 (CUSTOM 7)
to take pictures using previously-saved
shooting menu settings.
Mode Selection: Still Photography or Movie
Choose whether the selected custom settings bank (C1 through
C7) is for still photography (x STILL) or movie recording
(F MOVIE).
1
Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus,
highlight xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING, and press MENU/OK.
N
You can also use B MOVIE SETTING> xF CUSTOM MODE
SETTING in the movie menus.
2
Highlight the desired custom set-
tings bank and press MENU/OK.
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
3
Highlight x STILL or F MOVIE and
press MENU/OK.
The selected custom settings bank
can now be used for still photogra-
phy or movie recording.
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
x
F
CUS
T
O
M M
O
DE
S
ETTIN
G
x
F
STILL
MOVIE
84
5
Taking Photographs
Saving Current Settings
Save current settings in a custom settings bank.
1
Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo
menus, highlight x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and
press MENU/OK.
N
To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight a destination bank for cur-
rent settings (C1 through C7) and
press MENU/OK.
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 6
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 7
CUSTOM 1
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
EXIT
3
Highlight SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
and press MENU/OK.
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
CUSTOM 1
4
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
Current settings will be saved to the
selected bank.
CUSTOM 1
SAVE THE CHANGES OK?
OK
CANCEL
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
85
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Editing Custom Settings
Edit existing custom settings banks.
1
Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo
menus, highlight x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and
press MENU/OK.
N
To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom set-
tings bank and press MENU/OK.
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 6
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 7
CUSTOM 1
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
EXIT
3
Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press
MENU/OK.
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
CUSTOM 1
4
The camera will display a list of shoot-
ing menu items; highlight an item
you wish to edit and press MENU/OK.
Adjust the selected item as desired.
CUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECK
SHOOTING MODE
SHUTTER SPEED
APERTURE
EXP. COMPENSATION
DRIVE MODE
EXIT
86
5
Taking Photographs
5
Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting
menu list.
Adjust additional items as desired.
N
If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> AUTO
UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the photo menu or for B MOVIE
SETTING> FAUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the mov-
ie menu, red dots will appear next to the edited items but the
changes will not be saved automatically.
•
To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in the
list and press Q.
•
To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVE
THE CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous
settings, select RESET THE CHANGES.
•
If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copied
with the changes intact.
87
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Copying Custom Settings
Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting the
settings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been re-
named, the name will also be copied to the destination bank.
1
Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus,
highlight x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and press MENU/OK.
N
To copy settings for a movie custom settings bank, navigate to
B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/
SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.
2
Highlight the source bank and press
MENU/OK.
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 6
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 7
CUSTOM 1
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
EXIT
3
Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK.
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
CUSTOM 1
88
5
Taking Photographs
4
Highlight the destination bank (C1
through C7) and press MENU/OK.
A con rmation dialog will be dis-
played.
N
Any changes to custom settings in the
destination bank will be overwritten.
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 6
COPY TO
CUSTOM 7
CUSTOM 1
5
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
The selected settings will be copied
to the destination bank, overwriting
any existing settings.
COPY
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
COPY OK?
OK
CANCEL
89
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Resetting Custom Settings
Reset selected custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N
This assumes that you wish to reset settings for still photography.
To reset movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the
movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom set-
tings bank and press MENU/OK.
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 6
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 7
CUSTOM 1
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
EXIT
3
Highlight RESET CUSTOM SETTING
and press MENU/OK.
A con rmation dialog will be displayed.
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
CUSTOM 1
4
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
The selected bank will be reset.
RESET CUSTOM SETTING OK?
RESET ALL SETTINGS TO DEFAULT
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
OK
CANCEL
90
5
Taking Photographs
P, S, A, and M Modes
Renaming Custom Settings Banks
Rename selected custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N
This assumes that you wish to rename settings for still photogra-
phy. To rename movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in
the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom set-
tings bank and press MENU/OK.
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 6
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 7
CUSTOM 1
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
EXIT
3
Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME and
press MENU/OK.
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
CUSTOM 1
4
Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and select
SET.
The selected bank will be renamed.
91
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
Take pictures using autofocus.
1
Select single or continuous AF for G AF/MF SETTING>
FOCUS MODE in the shooting menu (P 92).
2
Use G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE to choose an AF mode
(P 94).
3
Select G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS
AREA and choose the position and
size of the focus frame (P 96).
4
Take pictures.
92
5
Taking Photographs
Focus Mode
Choose how the camera focuses.
1
Press MENU/OK to display the menus.
2
Select G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS MODE in the shooting
menu.
3
Choose from the following options:
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
p
MANUAL FOCUS
Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for man-
ual control of focus or in situations in which the camera is
unable to focus using autofocus (P 100).
k
CONTINUOUS AF
Focus is continually adjusted to refl ect changes in the dis-
tance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed
halfway. Use for subjects that are in motion.
l
SINGLE AF
Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Choose for stationary subjects.
N
•
Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.
•
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF, focus will be ad-
justed continuously in modes l and k even when the shutter but-
ton is not pressed.
93
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
The Focus Indicator
Focus status is shown by the focus indicator.
Focus indicator
Focus indicator
Focus indicator
Focus status
Focus status
( ) Camera focusing.
z
(lights green)
Subject in focus; focus locked (focus mode l).
(z)
(lights green)
Subject in focus (focus mode k). Focus is automatically ad-
justed for changes in distance to subject.
A
(blinks white)
Camera unable to focus.
j Manual focus (focus mode p).
94
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus Options (AF Mode)
Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the
combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes.
1
Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
2
Select G AF/MF SETTING> AF MODE.
3
Choose an AF mode.
How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode.
Focus Mode
Focus Mode
l
l
(SINGLE AF)
(SINGLE AF)
Option
Option
Description
Description
Sample image
Sample image
r
SINGLE POINT
Camera focuses on subject in
selected focus point. Use for pin-
point focus on selected subject.
y
ZONE
Camera focuses on subject in se-
lected focus zone. Focus zones in-
clude multiple focus points, mak-
ing it easier to focus on subjects in
motion.
z
WIDE
Camera focuses automatically on
high-contrast subjects; display
shows areas in focus.
j
ALL
Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-
play (P 97, 98) to cycle through AF modes in the following
order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z WIDE.
95
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
Focus Mode
Focus Mode
k
k
(CONTINUOUS AF)
(CONTINUOUS AF)
Option
Option
Description
Description
Sample image
Sample image
r
SINGLE POINT
Focus tracks subject at selected fo-
cus point. Use for subjects moving
toward or away from camera.
y
ZONE
Camera tracks focus in selected fo-
cus zone. Use for subjects that are
moving fairly predictably.
z
TRACKING
Focus tracks subjects moving
through wide area of frame.
j
ALL
Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-
play (P 97, 98) to cycle through AF modes in the following
order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z TRACKING.
96
5
Taking Photographs
Focus-Point Selection
Choose a focus point for autofocus.
Viewing the Focus-Point Display
1
Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
2
Select G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS AREA to view the fo-
cus-point display.
3
Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to
choose a focus area.
N
The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 31).
97
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
Selecting a Focus Point
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
the focus point and the rear command
dial to choose the size of the focus frame.
The procedure varies with the option se-
lected for AF mode.
AF mode
AF mode
Focus stick
Focus stick
Rear command
Rear command
dial
dial
DISP/BACK
DISP/BACK
button
button
Tilt
Tilt
Press
Press
Rotate
Rotate
r
Select focus
point
Select
highlighted focus
point
Choose from 6
frame sizes
Select center
focus point
y
Choose from 3
frame sizes
z
—
N
•
Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/
TRACKING is selected in focus mode l.
•
If j ALL is selected for AF mode, you can rotate the rear command
dial in the focus-point selection display to cycle through AF modes
in the following order: r SINGLE POINT (6 frame sizes), y ZONE
(3 frame sizes), and either z WIDE (focus mode l) or z TRACKING
(focus mode k).
98
5
Taking Photographs
The Focus-Point Display
The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF
mode.
N
Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the large
squares.
AF mode
AF mode
r
r
SINGLE POINT
SINGLE POINT
y
y
ZONE
ZONE
z
z
WIDE/TRACKING
WIDE/TRACKING
Number of points avail-
able can be selected using
G
AF/MF SETTING>
NUMBER OF FOCUS
POINTS.
Choose from zones with
7 × 7, 5 × 5, or 3 × 3 focus
points.
Position focus frame over
subject you want to track
using continuous AF.
Autofocus
Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be
unable to focus on the subjects listed below.
•
Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies.
•
Subjects photographed through a window or other re ective object.
•
Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than re ect light, such as
hair or fur.
•
Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or ame.
•
Subjects that show little contrast with the background.
•
Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is
also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a
backdrop of highly contrasting elements).
99
5
Taking Photographs
Autofocus
Checking Focus
To zoom in on the current focus area for precise
focus, press the center of the focus stick (focus
lever). Press up to two times more to zoom in
further and a fourth time to cancel zoom.
Normal display Focus zoom
N
•
In focus mode l, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear com-
mand dial.
•
In focus mode l, select SINGLE POINT for AF MODE.
•
Focus zoom is not available in focus mode k or when G AF/MF
SETTING> PRE-AF is on.
•
Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS LEVER SETTING to
change the function performed by the center of the focus stick (focus
lever). D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING can
also be used to assign focus zoom to other controls.
100
5
Taking Photographs
Manual Focus
Adjust focus manually.
1
Select MANUAL FOCUS for G AF/MF
SETTING> FOCUS MODE.
2
Focus manually using the lens focus
ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce
the focus distance, right to increase.
3
Take pictures.
N
•
Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING to
reverse the direction of rotation of the focus ring.
•
Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.
101
5
Taking Photographs
Manual Focus
Quick Focus
•
To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press
the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size of
the focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial).
•
In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a cho-
sen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option
chosen for G AF/MF SETTING> xF INSTANT AF SETTING.
102
5
Taking Photographs
Checking Focus
A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual
focus mode.
The Manual Focus Indicator
The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the fo-
cus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP> FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu),
the blue bar the depth of eld, or in other words the distance in
front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus.
Focus distance
(white line)
Depth of eld
N
•
If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depth-
of- eld indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to
display standard indicators.
•
Use the G AF/MF SETTING> xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option
to choose how depth of eld is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT
BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of eld for
pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to
help you assess depth of eld for pictures that will be viewed at high
resolutions on computers or other electronic displays.
103
5
Taking Photographs
Manual Focus
Focus Zoom
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS CHECK, the cam-
era will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the
focus ring is rotated. Press the center of the focus stick (focus lever)
to exit zoom.
N
•
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area.
•
If OFF or FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT is selected for G AF/MF SETTING>
MF ASSIST, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial.
Zoom cannot be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL
MICROPRISM is selected.
104
5
Taking Photographs
Manual Focus
MF Assist
Use G AF/MF SETTING> MF ASSIST to choose a focus check option.
The following options are available:
•
DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image
in the center of the frame. Frame the
subject in the split-image area and ro-
tate the focus ring until the four parts
of the split image are correctly aligned.
•
DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern that
emphasizes blur is displayed when the
subject is out of focus, disappearing to
be replaced by a sharp image when the
subject is in focus.
•
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con-
trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until
the subject is highlighted.
105
5
Taking Photographs
Sensitivity
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
To view sensitivity settings, press the
ISObutton.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO1
AUTO2
AUTO3
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shoot-
ing conditions according to combination of standard and
maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed cho-
sen for A SHOOTING SETTING>ISO. Choose from
AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 (P 106).
160–12800
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in dis-
play.
L(80/100/125)
H(25600/51200)
Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may ap-
pear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range.
N
Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned o .
Adjusting Sensitivity
High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower
values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note,
however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities.
106
5
Taking Photographs
AUTO
Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum
shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3.
Item
Item
Options
Options
Default
Default
AUTO1
AUTO1
AUTO2
AUTO2
AUTO3
AUTO3
DEFAULT SENSITIVITY 160–12800 160
MAX. SENSITIVITY 400–12800 800 3200 12800
MIN. SHUTTER SPEED ⁄–¼ SEC, AUTO AUTO
The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the de-
fault and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the
default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure
would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED.
N
•
If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that
selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to
the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
•
The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER
SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected
for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
•
If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will auto-
matically adjust the minimum shutter speed according to the focal
length of the lens (the setting remains the same whether image sta-
bilization is on or o ).
107
5
Taking Photographs
Metering
Choose how the camera meters exposure.
A SHOOTING SETTING> PHOTOMETRY o ers a choice of the
following metering options:
O
The selected option will only take e ect if OFF is selected for g FACE/
EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the
G AF/MF SETTING menu.
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
o
MULTI
MULTI
The camera instantly determines exposure based on an analy-
sis of composition, color, and brightness distribution. Recom-
mended in most situations.
p
CENTER-
CENTER-
WEIGHTED
WEIGHTED
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest
weight to the area at the center.
v
SPOT
SPOT
The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent
to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects and
in other cases in which the background is much brighter or
darker than the main subject.
w
AVERAGE
AVERAGE
Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides
consistent exposure across multiple shots with the same light-
ing, and is particularly eff ective for landscapes and portraits of
subjects dressed in black or white.
N
To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/
MF SETTING> INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 159).
108
5
Taking Photographs
Exposure Compensation
Adjust exposure.
Rotate the rear command dial to adjust
exposure.
N
•
The command dial used in this role can be chosen using D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
•
In manual mode, exposure can be adjusted by rotating the front or
rear command dial after pressing a control to which d WHEN SET
TO B(ON/OFF SWITCH) is assigned.
O
•
The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode.
•
Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display,
although the display may not accurately re ect its e ects if:
-
the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 EV,
-
W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or
-
STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY.
Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the view nder or LCD
monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, the
display may not accurately re ect the e ects of exposure compensa-
tion during F-log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is select-
ed for F DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by
selecting mode M and adjusting exposure directly.
109
5
Taking Photographs
Focus/Exposure Lock
Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
1
Position the subject in the focus
frame and press the shutter button
halfway to lock focus and exposure.
Focus and exposure will remain
locked while the shutter button is
pressed halfway (AF/AE lock).
2
Press the button all the way down.
N
Focus and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available
when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF,
SHUTTER AE.
110
5
Taking Photographs
Focus/Exposure Lock
Other Controls
Focus and exposure can also be locked
using the AEL and AFON buttons. At de-
fault settings, you can use the AEL button
to lock exposure without locking focus.
If the AFON button is assigned AF LOCK
ONLY, it can similarly be used to lock fo-
cus without locking exposure.
•
While the assigned control is pressed,
pressing the shutter button halfway will
not end the lock.
•
If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> AE/
AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be
ended by pressing the control a second
time.
AEL button
(exposure lock)
AFON button
N
•
The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point
during exposure lock.
•
The AEL and AFON buttons can be assigned other roles using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposure
and focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 298).
111
5
Taking Photographs
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Capture motion in a series of pictures.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options.
2
If J CH HIGH SPEED BURST, J CH HIGH SPEED BURST
(1.25X CROP), or O CL LOW SPEED BURST is selected, the
camera will take pictures continuously while the shutter-re-
lease button is pressed.
Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the
memory card is full.
O
•
If le numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the re-
maining pictures will be recorded to a new folder.
•
Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record
all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if the
space available on the memory card is insu cient.
•
Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken.
•
Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus
mode.
•
Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the ash
may not re.
•
Recording times may increase during burst shooting.
•
The choice of burst modes varies with the option selected for
A SHOOTING SETTING> SHUTTER TYPE.
112
5
Taking Photographs
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Focus and Exposure
•
Select focus mode CONTINUOUS AF to vary focus with shot.
•
To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING> SHUTTER AE.
N
Depending on such factors as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure com-
pensation, exposure may not be adjusted automatically.
113
5
Taking Photographs
Bracketing
Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight one
of the following:
3
Press the focus stick left or right to highlight the desired
bracketing settings.
4
Press MENU/OK to select.
5
Take pictures.
Option
Option
P
P
W ISO BKT
114
V WHITE BALANCE BKT
114
Option
Option
P
P
s Bracketing
115
114
5
Taking Photographs
W ISO BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1⁄3, ±2⁄3, or ±1) in the drive mode
display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera will take
a picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two
additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other with
sensitivity lowered by the selected amount.
V WHITE BALANCE BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1, ±2, or ±3) in the drive mode dis-
play. Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot
and processes it to create three copies: one at the current white
balanced setting, one with ne-tuning increased by the selected
amount, and another with ne-tuning decreased by the selected
amount.
115
5
Taking Photographs
Bracketing
s Bracketing
O AE BKT
Use A SHOOTING SETTING> AE BKT SETTING to choose the
bracketing amount, bracketing order, and number of shots. The
camera will take the speci ed number of shots in sequence: one
using the metered value for exposure and the others over- or un-
der-exposed by multiples of the selected bracketing amount.
N
Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed the
limits of the exposure metering system.
X FILM SIMULATION BKT
Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and
processes it to create copies with di erent lm simulation settings,
chosen using
A
SHOOTING SETTING> FILM SIMULATION BKT.
Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three
shots with di erent dynamic ranges: 100% for the rst, 200% for
the second, and 400% for the third.
N
While dynamic range bracketing is in e ect, sensitivity will be restricted
to a minimum of ISO640; the sensitivity previously in e ect is restored
when bracketing ends.
116
5
Taking Photographs
Z FOCUS BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a se-
ries of photos, varying focus with each shot. The A SHOOTING
SETTING> FOCUS BKT SETTING item o ers a choice of MANUAL
and AUTO bracketing.
N
•
Do not adjust zoom during shooting.
•
Use of a tripod is recommended.
MANUAL
MANUAL
In MANUAL mode, you choose the following.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAMES Choose the number of shots.
STEP Choose the amount focus changes with each shot.
INTERVAL Choose the interval between shots.
Focus and FRAMES/STEP
The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and STEP
is shown in the illustration.
12345
Starting focus position
•
Focus proceeds from the starting position toward infi nity.
•
Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to larger
changes.
•
Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus reach-
es infi nity.
Frames
Step
117
5
Taking Photographs
Bracketing
AUTO
AUTO
In AUTO mode, the camera calculates FRAMES and STEP auto-
matically.
1
Select A SHOOTING SETTING in the shooting menu, high-
light FOCUS BKT SETTING, and press MENU/OK.
2
Select AUTO and choose an INTERVAL.
The view through the lens will be displayed.
3
Focus on the nearest end of the sub-
ject and press MENU/OK.
The selected focus distance appears
as A on the focus distance indicator.
SETSET POINT B
SET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
FOCUS BKT SETTING
N
The same focus range can be chosen by focusing on the farthest
end of the subject rst.
4
Focus on the farthest end of the sub-
ject and press DISP/BACK.
The selected focus distance (B) and
focus range (A to B) appear on the
focus distance indicator.
SETSET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
SET POINT B
FOCUS BKT SETTING
N
Instead of pressing the DISP/BACK button, you can press MENU/OK
and select A again.
5
Take photographs.
The camera will calculate values for
FRAMES and STEP automatically. The
number of frames will appear in the
display.
NO
118
5
Taking Photographs
HDR
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes
three shots, varying exposure each time, and combines
them into a single picture. The resulting photograph pre-
serves details in highlights and shadows.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options and select HDR.
2
Choose the amount the brightnesses of the exposures vary.
Option
Option
Description
Description
HDR AUTO
Dynamic range is automatically set to a value of from 200%
to 800%.
HDR200 Dynamic range is set to 200%.
HDR400 Dynamic range is set to 400%.
HDR800 Dynamic range is set to 800%.
HDR800+
Camera settings are adjusted for maximum variation in dy-
namic range.
3
Take photographs.
The camera will create a combined image.
119
5
Taking Photographs
HDR
O
•
Keep the camera steady.
•
The desired results may not be achieved in the subject moves or the
composition or lighting changes during shooting.
•
The picture will be cropped a very small amount and the resolution
will drop slightly.
•
Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a val-
ue according to the scene.
•
“Extended” sensitivity values are not supported.
•
Depending on the options selected for HDR and sensitivity, pictures
may not be taken at the selected shutter speed.
•
The ash does not re.
N
HDR images are indicated by a t icon during playback.
120
5
Taking Photographs
Panoramas
Follow an on-screen guide to create a panorama.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options and select
PANORAMA.
2
To select the size of the angle through which you will pan the
camera while shooting, press the focus stick (focus lever) left.
Highlight a size and press MENU/OK.
3
Press the focus stick right to view a choice of pan directions.
Highlight a pan direction and press MENU/OK.
4
Press the shutter button all the way down to start recording.
There is no need to keep the shutter button pressed during
recording.
5
Pan the camera in the direction
shown by the arrow. Shooting ends
automatically when the camera is
panned to the end of the guides and
the panorama is complete.
DIRECTIONANGLE
line in direction of
Sweep camera along yellow
121
5
Taking Photographs
Panoramas
For Best Results
•
Move the camera slowly in a small circle at a steady speed
•
Keep the camera parallel or at right angles to the horizon and be sure to
pan only in the direction shown by the guides
•
Try panning at a di erent speed if the desired results are not achieved
•
Prop your elbows against your sides
•
Use a tripod
•
For best results, use a lens with a focal length of 35 mm or less (50mm or
less in 35mm format).
O
•
If the shutter button is pressed all the way down before the panorama
is complete, shooting will end and no panorama may be recorded.
•
The last part of the panorama may not be recorded if shooting ends
before the panorama is complete.
•
Panoramas are created from multiple frames, and the camera may in
some cases be unable to stitch the frames together perfectly.
•
Panoramas may be blurred if the subject is poorly lit.
•
Shooting may be interrupted if the camera is panned too quickly or
too slowly. Panning the camera in a direction other than that shown
cancels shooting.
•
The camera may in some cases record a greater or lesser angle than
selected.
•
The desired results may not be achieved with:
-
Moving subjects
-
Subjects close to the camera
-
Unvarying subjects such as the sky or a eld of grass
-
Subjects that are in constant motion, such as waves and waterfalls
-
Subjects that undergo marked changes in brightness
•
If ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> SHUTTER AE, ex-
posure for the entire panorama is determined by the rst frame.
122
5
Taking Photographs
Panoramas
Viewing Panoramas
With the panorama displayed full frame, press the focus stick (focus lever)
down to start panorama playback. Vertical panoramas will scroll vertically,
horizontal panoramas horizontally.
PLAY
STOP PAUSE
•
In full-frame playback, you can use the rear command dial to zoom pan-
oramas in or out.
•
Panorama playback is controlled using the focus stick.
Focus stick
Focus stick
(focus lever)
(focus lever)
Full-frame
Full-frame
playback
playback
Panorama
Panorama
playback
playback
Panorama
Panorama
playback paused
playback paused
Up — End playback
Down Start playback Pause playback Resume playback
Left/right
View other pictures
Choose pan
direction
Scroll panorama
manually
123
5
Taking Photographs
Multiple Exposures
Create a photograph that combines multiple exposures.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
the drive mode options and select
MULTIPLE EXPOSURE.
2
Choose a blend mode.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ADDITIVE
The camera adds the exposures together. You may need to
lower exposure compensation depending on the number
of shots.
AVERAGE
The camera automatically optimizes exposure for the fi nal
picture. The background in series shot without changing
the composition will be optimally exposed.
BRIGHT
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only the
brightest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed de-
pending on their brightness and hue.
DARK
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only the
darkest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed de-
pending on their brightness and hue.
3
Take the rst shot.
124
5
Taking Photographs
Multiple Exposures
4
Press MENU/OK. The rst shot will be
shown superimposed on the view
through the lens and you will be
prompted to take the second shot.
EXITRETRY
NEXT
N
•
To return to the previous step and retake the rst shot, press the
focus stick (focus lever) left.
•
To save the rst shot and exit without creating a multiple expo-
sure, press DISP/BACK.
5
Take the second shot, using the rst
frame as a guide.
EXIT
6
Press MENU/OK.
The combined exposures will be dis-
played as a guide to composing the
next shot.
EXITRETRY
N
•
To return to the previous step and retake the second shot, press
the focus stick left.
•
To end shooting and create a multiple exposure from the shots
taken to this point, press DISP/BACK.
7
Make additional exposures.
Each photograph can contain up to nine exposures.
8
Press DISP/BACK to end shooting.
The camera will create the combined image and multiple ex-
posure shooting will end.
125
The Shooting Menus
126
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust image quality settings for still photography.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
EXIT
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded.
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
O 3 : 2
6240 × 4160
O 16 : 9
6240 × 3512
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
O 1 : 1
4160 × 4160
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
P 3 : 2
4416 × 2944
P 16 : 9
4416 × 2488
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
P 1 : 1
2944 × 2944
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
Q 3 : 2
3120 × 2080
Q 16 : 9
3120 × 1760
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
Q 1 : 1
2080 × 2080
The following options are available in SPORTS FINDER MODE
and when 1.25X CROP is selected in burst mode:
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
P 3 : 2
4992 × 3328
P 16 : 9
4992 × 2808
Option
Option
Image size
Image size
P 1 : 1
3328 × 3328
N
IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned o or another
shooting mode is selected.
127
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
IMAGE QUALITY
Choose a le format and compression ratio.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FINE
Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images.
NORMAL
Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of
images that can be stored.
FINE + RAW
Record both RAW and fi ne-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
NORMAL + RAW
Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
RAW
Record RAW images only.
The Function Buttons
To toggle RAW image quality on or o for a single shot, assign RAW to a
function button (P 295). Press the button once to select the option in
the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column).
Option currently selected for
Option currently selected for
IMAGE QUALITY
IMAGE QUALITY
Option selected by pressing function
Option selected by pressing function
button to which
button to which
RAW
RAW
is assigned
is assigned
FINE FINE + RAW
NORMAL NORMAL + RAW
FINE + RAW FINE
NORMAL + RAW NORMAL
RAW FINE
128
6
The Shooting Menus
RAW RECORDING
Choose whether to compress RAW images.
Option
Option
Description
Description
UNCOMPRESSED RAW images are not compressed.
LOSSLESS COMPRESSED
RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm
that reduces fi le size with no loss of image data. The im-
ages can be viewed in Capture One Express for Fujifi lm
1
,
Capture One for Fujifi lm
1
, Capture One
1
, RAW FILE
CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX
2
, FUJIFILM X RAW
STUDIO, or other software that supports “lossless” RAW
compression. Quality is the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
but the resulting fi les are anywhere from about 30 to 90
percent of their uncompressed size.
COMPRESSED
RAW images are compressed using a “lossy”, non-reversible
algorithm. Quality is about the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
but the resulting fi les are anywhere from about 25 to 35 per-
cent of their uncompressed size.
1 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://www.captureone.com/
2 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-powered-
by-silkypix/
129
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF.
Option
Option
Description
Description
JPEG
Pictures are recorded in the widely-supported JPEG for-
mat.
HEIF
Pictures are recorded in HEIF, a format with excellent com-
pression but limited options for viewing and sharing.
O
•
JPEG is automatically selected in place of HEIF during lter-e ect,
panorama, multiple-exposure, and HDR photography.
•
Selecting HEIF disables CLARITY and sets COLOR SPACE to sRGB.
•
HEIF pictures are stored on the memory card as les with the exten-
sion “.HIF”. Before the pictures can be viewed on a computer, the ex-
tension must be changed to “.HEIC”. This occurs automatically when
HEIF pictures are uploaded from the camera to a computer via USB.
130
6
The Shooting Menus
FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the e ects of di erent kinds of lm, including black-
and-white (with or without color lters). Choose a palette ac-
cording to your subject and creative intent.
Option
Option
Description
Description
c PROVIA/STANDARD
Ideal for a wide range of subjects.
d Velvia/VIVID
Vibrant reproduction, ideal for landscape and nature.
e ASTIA/SOFT
Softer color and contrast for a more subdued look.
i CLASSIC CHROME
Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look.
g PRO Neg. Hi
Ideal for portrait with slightly enhanced contrast.
h PRO Neg. Std
Ideal for portrait with soft gradations and skin tones.
g
CLASSIC Neg.
Enhanced color with hard tonality to increase image
depth.
n
NOSTALGIC Neg.
Amber tinted highlights and rich shadow tone for printed
photo look.
X ETERNA/CINEMA
Soft color and rich shadow tone suitable for fi lm look
movie.
N ETERNA BLEACH
BYPASS
Unique color with low saturation and high contrast. Suit-
able for still and movie.
a ACROS
Shoot in Black and White In rich details with sharpness.
Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) fi lters,
which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues
complementary to the selected color.
•
d ACROS+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast and
darkens skies.
•
c ACROS+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies
considerably.
•
b ACROS+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait.
131
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Option
Option
Description
Description
b MONOCHROME
Shoots in black and white. Available with yellow (Ye), red
(R), and green (G) fi lters, which deepen shades of gray cor-
responding to hues complementary to the selected color.
•
e MONOCHROME+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast
and darkens skies.
•
d MONOCHROME+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and dark-
ens skies considerably.
•
f MONOCHROME+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones
in portrait.
f SEPIA
Shoots in sepia tone.
N
•
Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness
settings.
•
Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 286).
•
For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/global/tag/the-world-of-film-simulation/?post_type=xstories
132
6
The Shooting Menus
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or
cool color cast) to the a ACROS and
b MONOCHROME monochrome lm
simulations. Color can be adjusted on the
WARM–COOL and G (Green)–M (Magenta)
axes.
SET
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a lm grain e ect.
ROUGHNESS
Option
Option
Description
Description
STRONG Choose for rougher grains.
WEAK Choose for smoother grains.
OFF Turn the eff ect off .
SIZE
Option
Option
Description
Description
LARGE Choose for coarser grains.
SMALL Choose for fi ner grains.
133
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that
tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STRONG Choose for a strong eff ect.
WEAK Choose for a weak eff ect.
OFF Turn the eff ect off .
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STRONG Choose for a strong eff ect.
WEAK Choose for a weak eff ect.
OFF Turn the eff ect off .
134
6
The Shooting Menus
WHITE BALANCE
For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches
the light source.
Option
Option
Description
Description
WA WHITE
PRIORITY
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for whiter
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
AUTO White balance is adjusted automatically.
AA AMBIENCE
PRIORITY
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for warmer
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
k CUSTOM 1
Measure a value for white balance.
l CUSTOM 2
m CUSTOM 3
k COLOR
TEMPERATURE
Choose a color temperature.
i DAYLIGHT
For subjects in direct sunlight.
j SHADE
For subjects in the shade.
k FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-1
Use under “daylight” fl uorescent lights.
l FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-2
Use under “warm white” fl uorescent lights.
m FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-3
Use under “cool white” fl uorescent lights.
n INCANDESCENT
Use under incandescent lighting.
g UNDERWATER
Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater
lighting.
N
•
In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired results—for
example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait
subjects—use custom white balance or choose a white balance op-
tion suited to the light source.
•
White balance is adjusted for ash lighting only in AUTO, WA WHITE
PRIORITY, AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY, and g modes. Turn the
ash o using other white balance options.
•
White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 286).
135
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Fine-Tuning White Balance
Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white
balance option displays a ne-tuning
dialog; use the focus stick (focus lever) to
ne-tune white balance.
WB SHIFT
SET
N
•
To exit without ne-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after se-
lecting a white balance option.
•
You cannot tilt the focus stick diagonally when ne-tuning white bal-
ance.
136
6
The Shooting Menus
Custom White Balance
Choose k, l, or m to adjust white
balance for unusual lighting conditions
using a white object as a reference (col-
ored objects can also be used to lend
photos a color cast). A white balance tar-
get will be displayed; position and size
the target so that it is lled by the reference object and press the
shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to
select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring
white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the most
recent value and display the ne-tuning dialog).
•
If “COMPLETED !” is displayed, press MENU/OK
to set white balance to the measured
value.
•
If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposure
compensation and try again.
•
If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure com-
pensation and try again.
k: Color Temperature
Adjust white balance to match the color temperature of the light
source.
N
Color temperature can be adjusted to make pictures “warmer” or “cold-
er” or deliberately produce colors that di er radically from those in real
life.
NOT CHANGESHIFT
CUSTOM 1
SHUTTER : NEW WB
COMPLETED !
SET CANCEL
137
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
1
Select k in the white balance menu.
The option currently selected for col-
or temperature will be displayed.
R:0 B:0
WHITE BALANCE
SET SHIFT
COLOR TEMPERATURE
2
Edit the color temperature using the
focus stick (focus lever) and press
MENU/OK.
A ne-tuning dialog will be dis-
played.
SHIFTSET
COLOR TEMPERATURE
N
•
You can also adjust color temperature in increments of 10K by
rotating the rear command dial.
•
Choose from values of from 2500 to 10000K.
•
To exit without ne-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after
choosing a color temperature.
3
Highlight a ne-tuning amount using the focus stick.
4
Press MENU/OK.
The changes will be applied. The se-
lected color temperature will appear
in the display.
Color Temperature
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, ex-
pressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of
direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature
have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature are
tinged with blue.
138
6
The Shooting Menus
DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjust dynamic range. Wide dynamic ranges reduce loss of de-
tail in highlights for more natural results with high-contrast or
backlit scenes.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO
V 100%
Choose for increased contrast.
Reduce loss of detail in highlights.
W 200%
X 400%
O
Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value
according to the scene.
N
•
If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either
V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting con-
ditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shut-
ter button is pressed halfway.
•
W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO320 to ISO12800,
X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO640 to 12800.
D RANGE PRIORITY
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-look-
ing results when photographing high-contrast scenes.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO
Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting con-
ditions.
STRONG
Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast
scenes.
WEAK
Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately
high-contrast scenes.
OFF
Contrast reduction off.
N
•
WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to ISO 12800,
STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO640 to 12800.
•
When an option other than OFF is selected, TONE CURVE, and
DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automatically; if you wish to ad-
just these settings manually, choose OFF.
139
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
TONE CURVE
With reference to a tone curve, adjust the
appearance of highlights or shadows,
making them harsher or softer. Choose
higher values to make shadows and
highlights harsher, lower values to make
them softer.
CANCELSET
HIGHLIGHTS SHADOWS
TONE CURVE
Option
Option
Description
Description
HIGHLIGHTS -2 to +4
SHADOWS -2 to +4
COLOR
Adjust color density.
Options
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
Options
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
140
6
The Shooting Menus
HIGH ISO NR
Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose high-
er values to reduce noise and smooth outlines, lower values to
leave outlines visible.
Options
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
CLARITY
Increase de nition while altering tones in highlights and shad-
ows as little as possible. Choose higher values for increased de -
nition, lower values for a softer e ect.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
O
The additional processing required at settings other than 0 increases
the time need to save each shot.
LONG EXPOSURE NR
Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
The additional processing required when ON is selected increases save
times.
141
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
Select ON to improve de nition by adjusting for di raction and
the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
Options
Options
ON OFF
COLOR SPACE
Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.
Option
Option
Description
Description
sRGB Recommended in most situations.
Adobe RGB For commercial printing.
PIXEL MAPPING
Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures.
1
Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGE
QUALITY SETTING tab.
2
Highlight PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pix-
el mapping.
O
•
Results are not guaranteed.
•
Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping.
•
Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is ele-
vated.
•
Processing may take a few seconds.
142
6
The Shooting Menus
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Save custom camera settings for commonly-encountered situa-
tions. Saved settings can be recalled by rotating the mode dial to
positions C1(CUSTOM1) through C7(CUSTOM7) (P 83).
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
Choose whether changes to saved custom settings apply auto-
matically.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ENABLE
Changes to custom settings banks CUSTOM 1 through
CUSTOM 7 apply automatically.
DISABLE
Changes do not apply automatically. Any changes to custom
settings must be applied manually (P 85).
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
Choose whether the current custom settings bank is to be used
for still photography or movie recording
(P 83)
.
143
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
Adjust settings for lenses attached via a mount adapter. The
camera can store settings for multiple lenses (LENS 1 through
LENS6).
N
•
DISTORTION CORRECTION, COLOR SHADING CORRECTION, and
PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION are available with lens-
es connected via an M mount adapter.
•
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode
(P 200).
FOCAL LENGTH SETTING
Enter the lens’s true focal length.
LENS 5
INPUT FOCAL LENGTH
SET CANCEL
DISTORTION CORRECTION
Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or
WEAK options to correct BARREL or
PINCUSHION distortion.
LENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION
BARREL MEDIUM
BARREL WEAK
BARREL STRONG
OFF
PINCUSHION WEAK
PINCUSHION MEDIUM
PINCUSHION STRONG
144
6
The Shooting Menus
COLOR SHADING CORRECTION
Color (shading) variations between the
center and edges of the frame can be ad-
justed separately for each corner.
To use color shading correction, follow the
steps below.
NEXT SET
1
Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The select-
ed corner is indicated by a triangle.
2
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to adjust shading until there is
no visible di erence in color between the selected corner and
the center of the image.
•
Press the focus stick left or right to adjust colors on the
cyan–red axis.
•
Press the focus stick up or down to adjust colors on the
blue–yellow axis.
N
To determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction
while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.
145
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
Choose from values between –5 and
+5. Choosing positive values increases
peripheral illumination, while choosing
negative values reduces peripheral il-
lumination. Positive values are recom-
mended for vintage lenses, negative val-
ues to create the e ect of images taken with an antique lens or a
pinhole camera.
N
To determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination cor-
rection while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.
EDIT LENS NAME
Change the lens name.
CANCELSET
146
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust focus settings for still photography.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab.
AF/MF SETTING
FOCUS MODE
AF MODE
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
PRE-AF
FOCUS AREA
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
AF POINT DISPLAY
EXIT
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 96).
FOCUS MODE
Choose how the camera focuses (P 92).
AF MODE
Choose how the camera focuses in modes l and k (P 94).
147
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
Select focus-tracking options for
CONTINUOUS AF focus mode. Choose
from Sets1 (SET1) through 5 (SET5) ac-
cording to your subject or select SET6
CUSTOM for custom focus-tracking op-
tions.
OK
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Option
Option
Description
Description
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
A standard tracking option that works well with
the typical range of moving subjects.
SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES &
CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT
The focus system attempts to track the chosen
subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to
keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely
to enter the focus area with the subject.
SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/
DECELERATING SUBJECT
The focus system attempts to compensate for
subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for
subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity.
SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING
SUBJECT
The focus system attempts to focus quickly on
subjects entering the focus area. Choose for sub-
jects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switch-
ing subjects.
SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING
& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT
Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only
to sudden changes in velocity but also to large
movements front to back and left to right.
SET 6 CUSTOM
Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED
TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA
SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on
the values for Sets 1–5 (P 148, 150).
148
6
The Shooting Menus
Focus Tracking Options
The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set are
described below.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how long the
camera waits to switch focus when an
object enters the focus area behind or in
front of the current subject. The higher
the value, the longer the camera will wait.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
LOCKED ON
QUICK
SETS THE TRACKING
SENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT
SWITCH
ADJUST
Options
Options
01234
O
•
The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
•
The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how sensi-
tive the tracking system is to changes in
subject velocity. The higher the value,
the greater the precision with which the
system attempts to respond to sudden
movement.
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ACCEL./DECEL.
STEADY
SETS THE SPEED TRACKING
SENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT
SWITCHADJUST
Options
Options
012
O
The higher the value, the more di culty the camera will have focusing
in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when
the subject is highly re ective or low in contrast.
149
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
This parameter determines the focus
area given priority in zone AF.
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
FRONTCENTER
AUTO
SETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY
OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA
SWITCHADJUST
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRONT Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera.
AUTO
The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone
and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it.
CENTER Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone.
O
This option takes e ect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode.
Set Values
Parameter values for the di erent sets are listed below.
TRACKING
TRACKING
SENSITIVITY
SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING
SPEED TRACKING
SENSITIVITY
SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA
ZONE AREA
SWITCHING
SWITCHING
SET 1
SET 1
20AUTO
SET 2
SET 2
3 0 CENTER
SET 3
SET 3
22AUTO
SET 4
SET 4
0 1 FRONT
SET 5
SET 5
32AUTO
150
6
The Shooting Menus
Custom Focus Tracking Options
Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6.
1
Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS>
SET 6 CUSTOM.
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
SET 6 CUSTOM
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
AUTO
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
RESETSET DETAIL
ADJUST
2
Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate
the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their
original values, press b.
3
Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete.
151
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in por-
trait orientation is stored separately from that used when the
camera is in landscape orientation.
Option
Option
Description
Description
OFF The same settings are used in both orientations.
FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately.
ON The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately.
AF POINT DISPLAY yz
Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when
ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING>
AF MODE.
Options
Options
ON OFF
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point se-
lection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected
for AF MODE.
Option
Option
Description
Description
117 POINTS (9 × 13)
Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point
grid.
425 POINTS (17 × 25)
Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point
grid.
152
6
The Shooting Menus
PRE-AF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus even
when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera
adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the
shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps
prevent missed shots.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery.
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist
autofocus.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
•
The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminator
in some cases.
•
If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to the
subject.
•
Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subject’s
eyes.
N
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 203).
153
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
If the camera detects human faces, it will
assign them priority over the background
and adjust settings appropriately for por-
traits when setting focus and exposure.
You can also choose whether the camera
focuses on the left or right eye when face
detection is on.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FACE DETECTION
ON
Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust
eye detection settings.
•
g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only.
•
u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye
to focus on when a face is detected.
•
w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential-
ly on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
•
v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential-
ly on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off .
O
•
If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may
not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture
is taken.
•
In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as a
whole rather than the portrait subject.
•
Enabling Intelligent Face Detection via FACE DETECTION ON auto-
matically selects OFF for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.
154
6
The Shooting Menus
N
•
A single face detected in or near the focus area will be marked with
a white frame.
•
If multiple faces are detected in the focus area, the camera will select
one automatically.
•
You can choose a di erent subject by tapping the display to repo-
sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
•
When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION or EDIT FOCUS AREA is cho-
sen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS LEVER SETTING >
TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever)
or (during view nder photography) touch controls (P 31).
•
When the camera is focused on an eye, you can switch from one
eye to the other using a function button to which RIGHT/LEFT EYE
SWITCH has been assigned.
•
If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no face is seen.
•
Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspend-
ed at the close of burst shooting.
•
Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal ori-
entation.
•
If the camera is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they are
hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus
on faces.
•
Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 286).
155
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected
type, such as animals or vehicles, when setting focus.
Option
Option
Description
Description
SUBJECT
DETECTION ON
Select one of the subject types listed below to enable subject
detection.
•
E ANIMAL: The camera detects and tracks focus on dogs and
cats.
•
F BIRD: The camera detects and tracks focus on birds.
•
G AUTOMOBILE: The camera detects and tracks focus on
the body or front ends of cars, primarily those of types used
for motor sports.
•
H MOTORCYCLE&BIKE: The camera detects and tracks
focus on the riders of motorcycles and bicycles.
•
I AIRPLANE: The camera detects and tracks focus on the
cockpits, noses, or bodies of airplanes.
•
J TRAIN: The camera detects and tracks focus on the driver
compartments or front ends of trains.
OFF Subject detection off .
O
Enabling subject detection via SUBJECT DETECTION ON automatical-
ly selects OFF for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING.
156
6
The Shooting Menus
N
•
A single subject of the chosen type detected in or near the focus area
will be marked with a white frame.
•
If multiple subjects are detected in the focus area, the camera will
select one automatically.
•
You can choose a di erent subject by tapping the display to repo-
sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
•
When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION or EDIT FOCUS AREA is cho-
sen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FOCUS LEVER SETTING >
TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever)
or (during view nder photography) touch controls (P 31).
•
If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no subject of the chosen type is seen.
•
Depending on shooting conditions, subject detection may be sus-
pended at the close of burst shooting.
•
Subjects can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal
orientation.
•
Subject detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 286).
157
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
AF+MF
If ON is selected and focus has been locked (whether by pressing
the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can be
ended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
•
Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus
mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables the
focus distance indicator.
•
If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus
ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set to
in nity or the minimum focus distance.
N
•
The previously-selected focus mode will be restored if no operations
are performed for a set period after the focus ring is rotated.
•
DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE and DIGITAL MICROPRISM focus assist op-
tions selected via MF ASSIST cannot be used.
AF + MF Focus Zoom
Selecting ON for G AF/MF SETTING> FOCUS CHECK when SINGLE
POINT is chosen for AF MODE lets you zoom in on the current focus area
by rotating the focus ring. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rear
command dial.
158
6
The Shooting Menus
MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode.
Option
Option
Description
Description
DIGITAL SPLIT
IMAGE
Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR)
split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the
split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts of
the split image are correctly aligned.
DIGITAL
MICROPRISM
A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject
is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when
the subject is in focus.
FOCUS PEAK
HIGHLIGHT
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and
peaking level.
OFF
Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking, digital split image, and
digital microprism are not available).
FOCUS CHECK
If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the
selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual fo-
cus mode.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
•
Press the focus stick (focus lever) to cancel focus zoom.
•
The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes
when the focus area is changed.
159
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA
Choose ON to meter the current focus frame when SPOT or
MULTI metering is selected.
Options
Options
ON OFF
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
Chooses how the camera focuses when a button to which focus
lock or AF-ON is assigned is pressed with MANUAL FOCUS se-
lected for FOCUS MODE.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AF-S
The camera focuses when the button is pressed.
AF-C
The camera focuses while the button is pressed.
N
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 204).
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
Choose the basis for the depth-of- eld scale.
Option
Option
Description
Description
PIXEL BASIS
Provides a precision reference for use when assessing depth of fi eld
for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers
or other electronic displays.
FILM FORMAT
BASIS
Provides a practical reference for use when assessing depth of fi eld
for pictures that will be viewed at lower resolutions, for example
as prints.
N
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 204).
160
6
The Shooting Menus
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
Choose how the camera focuses when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down with SINGLE AF or CONTINUOUS AF
selected for FOCUS MODE.
Option
Option
Description
Description
RELEASE
Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken
when the camera is not in focus.
FOCUS
Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only
taken when the camera is in focus.
O
Regardless of the option selected, pictures can still be taken when the
camera is not in focus if ON is selected for AF+MF.
161
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
Limit the range of available focus distances for increased focus
speed.
Option
Option
Description
Description
OFF Focus limiter disabled.
CUSTOM
Limit focus to a range of distances defi ned by a minimum and
maximum.
•
OK: Limit focus to the selected range.
•
SET: Choose two objects and limit focus to the distance be-
tween them.
PRESET1
Limit focus to a preset range.
PRESET2
O
•
Choosing a focus range that includes distances shorter than the min-
imum focus distance of the lens disables the focus limiter.
•
The values listed and displayed for the focus limiter may di er from
the actual focus distance.
•
Focus range can be set independently on lenses equipped with fo-
cus range selectors. Be sure that the option selected in the camera
menus overlaps with that chosen with the lens.
N
•
The following additional operations can be performed when CUSTOM
is selected:
-
You can tap objects in the touch screen display to choose the focus
range.
-
Instead of tapping an object in the display, you set the maximum
focus distance to in nity by rotating the focus ring.
•
Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 204).
162
6
The Shooting Menus
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
TOUCH
SHOOTING
Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your fi nger
on the display.
AF
AFOFF
•
In focus mode l (SINGLE AF), the camera focuses when you
tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at the current dis-
tance until you tap the AFOFF icon.
•
In focus mode k (CONTINUOUS AF), the camera initiates focus
when you tap your subject display. The camera will continue
to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until
you tap the AFOFF icon.
•
In manual focus mode p (MANUAL FOCUS), you can tap the
display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus.
AREA
Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.
OFF
Touch screen mode off .
N
•
The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
•
T
o disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-
tor, select OFF for
D
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING
>
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
.
163
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Di erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.
Mode
Mode
Operation performed
Operation performed
TOUCH SHOOTING
TOUCH SHOOTING SINGLE AF/MANUAL FOCUS: Take a picture
AF
AF
SINGLE AF: AF
MANUAL FOCUS: Instant AF
AREA
AREA
SINGLE AF: AF
MANUAL FOCUS: Instant AF
OFF
OFF SINGLE AF/MANUAL FOCUS: OFF
Other Areas
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie re-
cording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.
164
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust shooting options for still photography.
To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the
A
(SHOOTING SETTING) tab.
N
The options available vary with the shoot-
ing mode selected.
SHOOTING SETTING
SELF-TIMER
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
SELF-TIMER LAMP
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
FILTER SETTING
SPORTS FINDER MODE
PRE-SHOT
EXIT
FILTER SETTING
Choose the lter used when the mode dial is rotated to FILTER
(P 82).
SPORTS FINDER MODE
Take pictures using the crop in the center
of the display. Choose this option for pic-
tures of athletes, birds, and other moving
subjects.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
Pictures are taken using a 1.25× crop, reducing the picture angle by an
amount equivalent to increasing lens focal length by 1.25×; the crop
is shown by a frame in the display.
OFF The 1.25× crop is disabled.
N
•
The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE SIZE item in the shoot-
ing menu is xed at P.
•
The sports nder is not available in modes that o er an electronic
shutter.
165
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
PRE-SHOT sJ
To reduce the lag between your pressing the shutter button all
the way down and the resulting picture being recorded to the
memory card, the camera starts shooting with the electronic
shutter when the shutter button is pressed halfway and saves a
series shots starting just before the shutter button is pressed the
rest of the way down.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
•
Pre-shot photography is available only when s ELECTRONIC
SHUTTER is selected in CH (high speed burst) drive mode
(P 171).
•
Flash photography is disabled.
166
6
The Shooting Menus
SELF-TIMER
Choose a shutter release delay.
Option
Option
Description
Description
R 2 SEC
The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter
button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts
down.
S 10 SEC
The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The
self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken.
OFF Self-timer off .
If an option other than OFF is select-
ed, the timer will start when the shutter
button is pressed all the way down. The
display shows the number of seconds re-
maining until the shutter is released. To
stop the timer before the picture is taken,
press DISP/BACK.
9
O
•
Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing in
front of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure.
•
The self-timer turns o automatically when the camera is turned o .
167
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
If ON is selected, the setting chosen for SELF-TIMER will remain
in e ect after the camera is turned o .
Options
Options
ON OFF
SELF-TIMER LAMP
If ON is selected, the self-timer lamp will light during self-timer
photography. Select OFF when shooting night scenes or in other
situations in which you would prefer that the lamp remain unlit.
Options
Options
ON OFF
168
6
The Shooting Menus
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
Con gure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset
interval.
1
Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
in the
A
(SHOOTING SETTING) tab
and press MENU/OK.
CANCELEND
INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMES
INTERVAL
NUMBER OF TIMES
2
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
choose the interval and number of
shots. Press MENU/OK to proceed.
START WAITING TIME
ESTIMATED START TIME
LATER
CANCELSTART
PM
3
Use the focus stick to choose the
starting time and then press MENU/OK.
Shooting will start automatically.
CANCEL
O
Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of
“bulb” or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only
one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released.
N
•
Use of a tripod is recommended.
•
We recommend using an AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
•
The display turns o between shots and lights a few seconds before
the next shot is taken.
•
The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button.
•
To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals the
number of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photogra-
phy started, set the number of shots to ∞.
169
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer
photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots.
Options
Options
ON OFF
O
•
Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er-
ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVAL
TIMER SHOOTING> INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim
dramatically during shooting.
•
In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an
AUTO option is selected for ISO.
170
6
The Shooting Menus
AE BKT SETTING
Adjust exposure bracketing settings.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAMES/STEP SETTING
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence
and the amount exposure is varied with each shot.
•
FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence.
•
STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with each
shot.
1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS
•
1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken
one at a time.
•
CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence are
taken in a single burst.
SEQUENCE SETTING Choose the order in which the shots are taken.
FILM SIMULATION BKT
Choose the three lm simulation types used for lm simulation
bracketing (P 130).
FOCUS BKT SETTING
Choose from AUTO and MANUAL focus bracketing modes
(P 116).
PHOTOMETRY
Choose how the camera meters exposure (P 107).
171
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
SHUTTER TYPE
Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mute
the shutter sound.
Option
Option
Description
Description
t MECHANICAL SHUTTER
Take pictures with the mechanical shutter.
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
Take pictures with the electronic shutter.
t E-FRONT CURTAIN
SHUTTER
Take pictures with the electronic front curtain shutter.
u MECHANICAL+
ELECTRONIC
The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
shutter according to shooting conditions.
v E-FRONT+
MECHANICAL
The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
front curtain shutter according to shooting conditions.
w E-FRONT+
MECHANICAL +ELECTRONIC
The camera chooses the mechanical, electronic, or
electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting
conditions.
O
•
When using the electronic shutter, note the following:
-
Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects.
-
Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at high
shutter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended.
-
Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under uorescent lights
or other ickering or erratic illumination.
-
When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 252), respect
your subjects’ image rights and right to privacy.
•
When using the electronic front-curtain shutter, note the following:
-
Faster shutter speeds are more likely to result in uneven exposure
and loss of resolution in out-of-focus areas of the frame.
N
The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:
•
Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO 12800–160
•
Long exposure noise reduction has no e ect
172
6
The Shooting Menus
FLICKER REDUCTION
Reduce icker in pictures and the display when shooting under
uorescent lighting and other similar light sources.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ALL FRAMES
Flicker reduction is applied to all frames continuous
shooting frame rate reduces.
FIRST FRAME
Flicker measurement is taken prior to the fi rst frame only
and the same reduction amount is applied to all subse-
quent frames that fl icker may occur.
OFF Flicker reduction disabled.
O
•
Flicker reduction increases the time needed to record pictures.
•
Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording.
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Select ON to allow shutter speed to be ne-tuned to reduce ick-
er caused by LED lighting and the like.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
This option takes e ect only in modes S and M.
173
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or o .
Option
Option
Description
Description
CONTINUOUS Image stabilization on.
SHOOTING ONLY
Image stabilization enabled only when the shutter button
is released (or, if CONTINUOUS AF is selected for G AF/
MF SETTING> FOCUS MODE, while the shutter but-
ton is pressed halfway).
OFF
Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.
N
•
The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with IS MODE.
•
Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes e ect.
ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light (P 105).
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
Adjust settings for optional cooling fans (P 334).
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO1
The fan turns on automatically as required when camera
temperature rises and runs at slow speed.
AUTO2
The fan turns on automatically as required when camera
temperature rises and runs at high speed. The increased
fan noise may be audible in movies.
LOW Run the fan continuously at low speed.
HIGH
Run the fan continuously at high speed. The increased fan
noise may be audible in movies.
OFF Turn the fan off .
174
6
The Shooting Menus
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest version of apps. The
smartphone can then be used to:
•
Control the camera and take pictures remotely
•
Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
•
Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-
tures
•
Upload location data to the camera
N
For more information, visit:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
175
6
The Shooting Menus
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust ash-related settings for still photography.
To display ash settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the F(FLASH SETTING) tab.
FLASH SETTING
RED EYE REMOVAL
TTL-LOCK MODE
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
EXIT
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
Choose a ash control mode, ash mode,
or sync mode or adjust the ash level.
The options available vary with the ash.
N
For more information on ash settings, see
“External Flash Units” (P 315) in “Peripher-
als and Optional Accessories”.
EF-X8
MODE
END
ADJUST
RED EYE REMOVAL
Remove red-eye e ects caused by the ash.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FLASH Flash red-eye reduction only.
OFF Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal off .
N
Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL ash control mode.
176
6
The Shooting Menus
TTL-LOCK MODE
Instead of adjusting ash level with each shot, TTL ash control
can be locked for consistent results across a series of photo-
graphs.
Option
Option
Description
Description
LOCK WITH LAST FLASH
Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most
recent photo.
LOCK WITH METERING
FLASH
The camera emits a series of pre-fl ashes and locks fl ash
output at the metered value.
N
•
To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use
the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 295).
•
Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in e ect.
•
Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if no
previously metered value exists.
LED LIGHT SETTING
Choose whether to use the ash unit’s LED video light (if avail-
able) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos.
Option
Option
Role of LED video light in still photography
Role of LED video light in still photography
CATCHLIGHT Catchlight
AF ASSIST AF-assist illuminator
AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT AF-assist illuminator and catchlight
OFF None
N
In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.
177
6
The Shooting Menus
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
COMMANDER SETTING
Choose groups when using the camera ash unit as a command-
er for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control. This option is
available when the camera is used with clip-on ash units that
support Fuji lm optical wireless ash control.
Options
Options
Gr A Gr B Gr C OFF
N
In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.
CH SETTING
Choose the channel used for communication between the com-
mander and remote ash units. Separate channels can be used
for di erent ash systems or to prevent interference when multi-
ple systems are operating in close proximity.
Options
Options
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
178
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust options for movies shot during still photography us-
ing the t(movie recording) button.
To display movie settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the B(MOVIE SETTING) tab.
N
The options available vary with the shoot-
ing mode selected.
MOVIE SETTING
HIGH SPEED REC
MOVIE MODE
MEDIA REC SETTING
F IS MODE
F IS MODE BOOST
EXIT
AUDIO SETTING
MOVIE MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 183). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
HIGH SPEED REC
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 184). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
MEDIA REC SETTING
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 185). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
F IS MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 193). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
F IS MODE BOOST
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 193). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
179
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
AUDIO SETTING
Adjust audio-related settings for movie recording.
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
MANUAL
Adjust the recording level manually. Press the focus stick (focus
lever) right to choose from 25 recording levels.
OFF Turn the built-in microphone off .
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
MANUAL
Adjust the recording level manually. Press the focus stick (focus
lever) right to choose from 25 recording levels.
OFF Disable recording using external microphones.
MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MIC
Choose this option for direct connection to an external micro-
phone.
LINE
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
Options
ON OFF
180
6
The Shooting Menus
WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut lter, reducing low-fre-
quency noise during movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option
Option
Description
Description
0 Mute output to the headphones.
1—10 Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.
181
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MIC INPUT CHANNEL
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with the
help of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel
(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
•
4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound with
the help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
•
2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
4ch AUDIO MONITORING
Choose the source of sound output to headphones or
other audio monitors during movie recording.
•
XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con-
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
•
CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in mi-
crophone.
HDMI 4ch AUDIO
OUTPUT
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
•
XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI con-
nector.
•
CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.
N
•
If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone
jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
•
Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected for
movie le format.
182
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust movie-recording options.
To display options for movie recording,
press MENU/OK in the movie shooting dis-
play and select the B(MOVIE SETTING)
tab.
MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
SHOOTING MODE
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
MEDIA REC SETTING
EXIT
MOVIE SETTING LIST
View current movie recording settings.
N
These options can also be viewed by pressing the DISP/BACK button while
the movie quick menu is displayed.
SHOOTING MODE
Choose a shooting mode for movies.
Options
Options
PROGRAM AE
SHUTTER
PRIORITY AE
APERTURE
PRIORITY AE
MANUAL
183
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
MOVIE MODE
Before shooting movies, choose the
frame rate and the frame size and aspect
ratio.
3840 × 2160 1h18m31s
MOVIE MODE
CANNOT USE S.S. SLOWER THAN FRAMERATE
CANCELEND
1
In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then high-
light MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight the
desired frame size and aspect ratio (
A
) and press the stick
right.
•
Choose J 3 : 2 for 6.2 K movies with an aspect ratio of 3 : 2.
•
Choose V16 : 9 or d17 : 9 for 4K movies with aspect ra-
tios of 16 or 17 to 9.
•
Choose W16 : 9 or W17 : 9 for Full HD movies with aspect
ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
3
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a
frame rate (
B
) and press MENU/OK.
Options
Options
23.98P 24P 25P 29.97P 50P 59.94P
N
The choice of frame rates varies with the movie mode.
184
6
The Shooting Menus
HIGH SPEED REC
Record high-frame-rate movies. High-frame-rate movies can be
played back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving
subjects or details too eeting for the naked eye. Select ON to
choose the recording and playback rates separately.
N
Choose ON HDMI ONLY to record footage only to external recorders
connected via HDMI. Note that this option does not support playback
frame-rate selection.
Frame Size
Options
Options
V16 : 9 d17 : 9 W16 : 9 W17 : 9
Playback
Options
Options
23.98P 24P 25P 29.97P 50P 59.94P
Recording
Options
Options
100P 120P 200P 240P
N
•
High-speed movies are recorded with no sound.
•
The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with the
goal of maintaining the selected bit rate.
•
The options available for playback rate vary with the option selected
for rate of recording.
185
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie le settings, including destination, le type, bit
rate, and proxy video.
MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie le settings, including destination, le type, and
compression.
Destination
Destination
Choose save options and save and output destinations for mov-
ies.
Option
Option
Description
Description
P
Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 1.
Q
Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 2.
R
Footage is recorded to the memory card in Slot 1 until the card
fi lls. Any additional footage will then automatically be record-
ed to the card in Slot 2.
T
Each movie is recorded twice, once to each card.
U
Movies are recorded only to devices connected via HDMI.
O
The current movie mode applies to both copies; settings for backup
copies cannot be adjusted separately.
186
6
The Shooting Menus
File Type and Compression
File Type and Compression
Choose the movie le type and compression.
Option
Option
Description
Description
H.264 ALL-I 420 MOV
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is
recorded at a depth of 8 bits using All-I interframe
compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
H.264 LongGOP 420 MOV
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is
recorded at a depth of 8 bits using Long GOP in-
terframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sam-
pling.
H.264 LongGOP 420 MP4
A format suitable for movies that will be uploaded
to the web.
H.265 ALL-I 420 MOV
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
ing All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma
sub-sampling.
H.265 LongGOP 420 MOV
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
ing Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0
chroma sub-sampling.
H.265 ALL-I 422 MOV
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
ing All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma
sub-sampling.
H.265 LongGOP 422 MOV
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits us-
ing Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2
chroma sub-sampling.
ProRes HQ MOV
*
Record movies in ProRes 422 HQ format.
ProRes 422 MOV
*
Record movies in ProRes 422 format.
ProRes LT MOV
*
Record movies in ProRes 422 LT format.
* Available only when P is selected as the destination.
187
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
N
•
The ProRes format is intended for the footage will be edited on a
computer or the like.
•
4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling is used for footage output to external
devices connected via HDMI; H.264 footage is output at a bit depth of
8 bits and footage in other formats at a depth of 10 bits.
•
All-I compresses each frame separately. Files are larger, but the fact
that the data for each frame are saved separately makes this a good
choice for footage that will be further processed.
•
Long GOP balances good image quality with high compression. Files
are smaller, making it a good choice for longer movies.
•
The options available for le type and compression vary with the op-
tions selected for MOVIE MODE, HIGH SPEED REC, and F-Log/HLG
RECORDING.
Bit Rate
Bit Rate
Choose the movie bit rate.
Options
Options
50Mbps 100Mbps 200Mbps 360Mbps 720Mbps
N
•
The options available for bit rate vary with the settings chosen for
high-speed movie recording and compression. The actual bit rate
may be slower than the selected value depending on the subject.
•
The bit rate for ProRes movies is set automatically according to the
format chosen and the frame size and rate. For more information, visit
the Apple website.
188
6
The Shooting Menus
PROXY SETTING (ONLY WHEN REC ProRes)
Choose whether the camera simultaneously records a duplicate
“proxy” video with movies shot in ProRes format.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON (H.264) Record proxy videos in H.264 format.
ON (ProRes Proxy) Record proxy videos in ProRes Proxy format.
OFF Proxy recording disabled.
O
•
Deleting the original footage from the camera also deletes the proxy
video. The original and proxy videos cannot be deleted separately.
•
When deleting movies from camera memory cards using a computer,
be sure to delete both the originals and the proxies.
189
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is output to an
HDMI device.
HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY
If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected
will mirror the information in the camera display.
Options
Options
ON OFF
HDMI REC CONTROL
Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals
to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to start
and stop movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
RAW OUTPUT SETTING
Choose whether to output RAW footage to external recorders
connected via HDMI.
Option
Option
Description
Description
RAW OUTPUT
RAW OUTPUT
SETTING ATOMOS
SETTING ATOMOS
Output RAW footage to ATOMOS video recorders.
RAW OUTPUT
SETTING Blackmagic
Output RAW footage to Blackmagic Design video recorders.
OFF Do not output RAW footage to external recorders.
190
6
The Shooting Menus
N
•
RAW footage output to external devices is not saved to the memory
cards inserted in the camera.
•
In-camera image enhancements are not applied to the RAW output.
•
ISO sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 1000 and ISO 12800.
•
Footage with a frame size of 4848 × 2728 (4.8 K) is recorded using a
1.29× crop.
•
Footage output to external devices is generated from the original
RAW data and its quality, which varies with device speci cations, may
not be equal to that achieved as the end result of post-production
or the like.
•
Focus zoom is not available when RAW is selected for HDMI output.
•
RAW footage output via HDMI to incompatible devices will not dis-
play correctly but will instead will display as a mosaic.
•
RAW output is disabled in some movie and high-speed recording
modes.
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
Fix the movie crop ratio at 1.38∶1. This makes it easier to match
crops after changing movie settings.
Options
Options
ON OFF
191
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
Choose the destination for F‐Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma)
movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device.
Option
Option
Description
Description
c P Y P
The footage is processed using fi lm simulation and both
saved to the memory card and output to the HDMI device.
c F-Log Y F-Log
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
the HDMI device in F-Log format.
c FLog2 Y FLog2
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
the HDMI device in F-Log2 format.
c HLG Y HLG
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
the HDMI device in HLG format.
N
•
F-Log and FLog2 o er gentle gamma curves with wide gamuts suit-
able for further processing post-production. Sensitivity is restricted to
values between ISO640 and ISO12800 (F-Log) or between ISO1250
and ISO12800 (FLog2).
•
The HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) recording format conforms to the in-
ternational ITU-R BT2100 standard. When viewed on HLG-compatible
displays, high-quality HLG footage faithfully captures high-contrast
scenes and vivid colors. Sensitivity is restricted to values between
ISO1000 and ISO12800.
•
Film simulation (P) footage is recorded using the option selected
for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> F FILM SIMULATION in the
shooting menu.
192
6
The Shooting Menus
DATA LEVEL SETTING
Choose a signal range for movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
VIDEO RANGE
The signal range for 8-bit movies is limited to 16–235 and that
for 10-bit movies to 64–940.
FULL RANGE
The signal ranges for 8-bit and 10-bit movies are respectively
0–255 and 0–1023.
F PHOTOMETRY
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 107).
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 172).
Options
Options
ON OFF
193
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
F IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or o .
Option
Option
Description
Description
IBIS/OIS
Enable in-body (IBIS) and optical (OIS) image stabilization.
IBIS is used with lenses that do not support OIS.
IBIS/OIS + DIS
Enable in-body (IBIS), optical (OIS), and digital (DIS) image
stabilization. The crop is adjusted according to the option
selected for MOVIE MODE.
OFF
Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.
N
•
The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with the IS mode.
•
Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes e ect.
F IS MODE BOOST
Choose the image stabilization level.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON Suitable for hand-held shooting with no panning.
OFF Suitable for hand-held shooting with panning.
N
Assigning IS MODE BOOST to a function button allows the image sta-
bilization level to be changed while recording is in progress (P 295).
194
6
The Shooting Menus
F ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
Option
Option
Description
Description
H (25600)
Choose for special situations. Note that dynamic range may be
reduced and that pictures may be mottled.
160–12800 Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display.
AUTO
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting
conditions.
ZEBRA SETTING
Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes
in the movie mode display.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ZEBRA RIGHT
Right-slanting stripes.
ZEBRA LEFT
Left-slanting stripes.
OFF Stripes off .
ZEBRA LEVEL
Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display.
Options
Options
50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
195
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Select ON to allow movie settings to be adjusted using only the
command dials and touch-screen controls. You may nd this
helpful in preventing the sounds of camera controls being re-
corded with movies (P 33).
Options
Options
ON OFF
TALLY LIGHT
Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie
recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.
Indicator lamp AF-assist illuminator
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRONT OFF
REAR z
The indicator lamp lights during movie recording.
FRONT OFF
REAR y
The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording.
FRONT z
REAR z
The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording.
FRONT z
REAR OFF
The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording.
FRONT y
REAR y
The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording.
FRONT y
REAR OFF
The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording.
FRONT OFF
REAR OFF
The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain off during movie recording.
196
6
The Shooting Menus
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 173).
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 83).
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 142).
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
Choose whether the current custom settings bank is to be used
for still photography or movie recording
(P 83)
.
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 174).
197
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust image quality settings for movies.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
FFILM SIMULATION
FMONOCHROMATIC COLOR
FWHITE BALANCE
FDYNAMIC RANGE
FCOLOR
FSHARPNESS
FHIGH ISO NR
FTONE CURVE
EXIT
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FILM SIMULATION
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 130).
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 132).
198
6
The Shooting Menus
F WHITE BALANCE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 134).
F DYNAMIC RANGE
Choose a dynamic range for movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
V100%
See “DYNAMIC RANGE” (P 138).W200%
X400%
N
•
AUTO (automatic dynamic range control) is not available during
movie recording.
•
W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO320 to ISO12800,
X400% at sensitivities of from ISO640 to 12800.
•
This item is available when cPYP is selected for B MOVIE
SETTING> F-Log/HLG RECORDING.
F TONE CURVE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 139).
F COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 139).
199
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
F SHARPNESS
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 139).
F HIGH ISO NR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 140).
INTERFRAME NR
Select AUTO to automatically adjust interframe noise reduction
according to shooting conditions.
Options
Options
AUTO OFF
N
“Ghosting” may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting.
200
6
The Shooting Menus
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION
Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during
movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
•
If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the camera
is attached, peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to the
option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> xF MOUNT
ADAPTOR SETTING> PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
in the shooting menu (P 145).
•
Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this op-
tion.
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 143). Changes to
one apply to the other.
201
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust focus settings for movies.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and select
the G(AF/MF SETTING) tab.
AF/MF SETTING
F FOCUS MODE
F AF MODE
FAF-C CUSTOM SETTING
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
FSUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
FAF+MF
FFOCUS AREA
xFAF ILLUMINATOR
EXIT
N
The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 96).
O
The focus area for movie recording cannot be resized.
F FOCUS MODE
Choose the focus mode for movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
p MANUAL FOCUS
Focus manually.
k CONTINUOUS AF
The camera focuses using AF-C.
l SINGLE AF
The camera focuses using AF-S.
202
6
The Shooting Menus
F AF MODE
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MULTI The camera selects the focus area automatically.
AREA The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area.
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
Select focus-tracking options when recording movies with
CONTINUOUS AF selected for F FOCUS MODE.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an ob-
ject enters the focus area behind or in front of the current sub-
ject. See “TRACKING SENSITIVITY” (P 148).
Options
Options
01234
O
•
The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
•
The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.
AF SPEED
Adjust the autofocus response speed. Choose higher values for
faster response times, lower values for slower response times.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
203
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 152). Changes to
one apply to the other.
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording
movies.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FACE DETECTION ON
See “g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING” (P 153).
OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off .
O
If SINGLE AF is chosen for FOCUS MODE when FACE DETECTION
ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING, the camera will automatically switch to CONTINUOUS AF.
Selecting MANUAL FOCUS when FACE DETECTION ON is selected
for Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING disables Intelligent Face
Detection.
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 155).
O
The camera automatically switches to continuous AF when SUBJECT
DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> F SUBJECT
DETECTION SETTING, even if SINGLE AF is selected for FOCUS
MODE. Subject detection is not available when MANUAL FOCUS is
selected.
F AF+MF
Select ON to enable manual focus in SINGLE AF and CONTINUOUS
AF modes. Manual focus can be suspended by pressing the AFON
button.
Options
Options
ON OFF
204
6
The Shooting Menus
F MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed when MANUAL FOCUS is select-
ed for FOCUS MODE.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a
color and peaking level.
OFF Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking is not available).
F FOCUS CHECK
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 158).
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 159). Changes to
one apply to the other.
N
Instant AF is disabled during movie recording. Use instant AF to focus
before recording begins.
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 159). Changes to
one apply to the other.
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 161). Changes to
one apply to the other.
205
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode
Mode
Description
Description
AF
Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point.
Use the shutter button to start and stop recording.
•
When SINGLE AF is selected for FOCUS MODE, you can
refocus at any time by tapping your subject in the display.
•
When CONTINUOUS AF is chosen for FOCUS MODE, the
camera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the dis-
tance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display.
•
When MANUAL FOCUS is selected for FOCUS MODE, the
camera will focus using autofocus if you tap the display before
recording begins; during recording, you can tap the display
again to move the focus area to a new location.
AREA
Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to start
and stop recording.
•
When SINGLE AF is selected for FOCUS MODE, you can
reposition the focus area at any time by tapping your subject
in the display. To focus, use the button to which AF-ON is as-
signed.
•
When CONTINUOUS AF is chosen for FOCUS MODE, the
camera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the dis-
tance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display.
•
When MANUAL FOCUS is selected for FOCUS MODE,
you can tap the display to position the focus area over your
subject.
OFF
Touch screen mode off .
N
•
The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
•
T
o disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-
tor, select OFF for
D
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING
>
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
.
206
6
The Shooting Menus
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Di erent touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.
Mode
Mode
Operation performed
Operation performed
AF
AF
SINGLE AF: AF
MANUAL FOCUS: Instant AF
AREA
AREA
SINGLE AF: AF
MANUAL FOCUS: Instant AF
OFF
OFF SINGLE AF/MANUAL FOCUS: OFF
Other Areas
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie re-
cording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
Choose whether focus zoom remains in e ect once movie re-
cording begins.
Options
Options
ON OFF
207
6
The Shooting Menus
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust settings for audio recorded during lming.
To display audio settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and select
the P(AUDIO SETTING) tab.
AUDIO SETTING
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
MIC JACK SETTING
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
LOW CUT FILTER
HEADPHONES VOLUME
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
WIND FILTER
EXIT
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
MANUAL
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
OFF Turn the built-in microphone off .
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
MANUAL
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
OFF Disable recording using external microphones.
208
6
The Shooting Menus
MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MIC
Choose this option for direct connection to an external micro-
phone.
LINE
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
Options
ON OFF
WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut lter, reducing low-fre-
quency noise during movie recording.
Options
Options
ON OFF
HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option
Option
Description
Description
0 Mute output to the headphones.
1—10 Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.
209
6
The Shooting Menus
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MIC INPUT CHANNEL
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with the
help of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel
(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
•
4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound with
the help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
•
2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
4ch AUDIO MONITORING
Choose the source of sound output to headphones or
other audio monitors during movie recording.
•
XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con-
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
•
CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in mi-
crophone.
HDMI 4ch AUDIO
OUTPUT
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
•
XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI con-
nector.
•
CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.
N
•
If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone
jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
•
Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected for
movie le format.
210
6
The Shooting Menus
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame num-
ber) display settings for movie recording.
To display time code settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display
and select the Q(TIME CODE SETTING)
tab.
TIME CODE SETTING
TIME CODE DISPLAY
START TIME SETTING
COUNT UP SETTING
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
DROP FRAME
EXIT
TIME CODE DISPLAY
Select ON to display time codes during movie recording and
playback.
Options
Options
ON OFF
START TIME SETTING
Choose the time code starting time.
Option
Option
Description
Description
MANUAL INPUT Choose a start time manually.
CURRENT TIME
Set the start time to the current time.
RESET Set the start time to 00:00:00.
211
6
The Shooting Menus
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
COUNT UP SETTING
Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during
movie recording.
Option
Option
Description
Description
REC RUN Time is clocked only during movie recording.
FREE RUN Time is clocked continuously.
DROP FRAME
At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradu-
ally develop between the time code (measured in seconds) and
the actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second).
Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to match
the recording time to the time code.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict
match between the time code and the actual recording time.
OFF Frames are not dropped.
N
•
The time code display varies with the option selected.
ON
OFF
•
Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop.
212
6
The Shooting Menus
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices.
Options
Options
ON OFF
213
Playback and the Playback
Menu
214
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Display
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed
during playback.
O
For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
1/99912/31/2022
BA DCEFGHI J
K
UVW
XY
b
f
QT
i
h
g
j
k
Z
a
M LNOPRS
d
c
e
A
Date and time ..................................52, 54, 245
B
Frame-number display
C
Location data................................................284
D
Bluetooth ON/OFF
E
Image transfer order
F
Image transfer status
G
Number of frames selected for upload
H
Protected image ........................................... 227
I
Card slot..........................................................219
J
Frame number ..............................................281
K
Low battery ......................................................51
L
Image quality................................................127
M
Movie mode .................................................. 182
N
HEIF ..................................................................129
O
Image size ......................................................126
P
Film format ....................................................186
Q
Film simulation ............................................ 130
R
Dynamic range ............................................138
S
HDR ..................................................................118
T
White balance .............................................. 134
U
Sensitivity ....................................................... 173
V
Exposure compensation ............................ 108
W
Aperture ...............................................73, 76, 78
X
Time code .......................................................210
Y
Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 78
Z
Playback mode indicator .............................59
a
Movie icon ........................................................69
b
Four-channel (quadrophonic) audio
..............................................................181, 209
c
HDR image ....................................................118
d
Red-eye removal indicator ........................175
e
Filter ....................................................................82
f
Face detection indicator ............................153
g
Photobook assist indicator .......................235
h
DPOF print indicator ...................................237
i
Rating ..............................................................230
j
Voice memo ..................................................229
k
Gift image .........................................................59
215
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Display
The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators during playback.
Standard Information o
2022.12.31 1/999
1/99912/31/2022
1/99912/31/2022
NEXT
Info display
216
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Display
Viewing Photo Information
The photo information display changes each
time the focus stick (focus lever) is pressed up.
Basic data Info display 1
2022.12.31 1/999
1/99912/31/2022 1/99912/31/2022
NEXT
LENS
23.0
mm
F
5.6
FOCAL LENGTH
23.0
mm
COLOR SPACE sRGB
LENS MODULATION OPT.
ON
S.S
F ISO
BACK
1/999
NEXT
12/31/2022 12:10 AM
Info display 3 Info display 2
Zooming in on the Focus Point
Press the center of the focus stick (focus lever) to zoom in on the focus
point. Press again to return to full-frame playback.
217
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Viewing Pictures
Read this section for information on playback zoom and
multi-frame playback.
Use the rear command dial to go from
full-frame playback to playback zoom or
multi-frame playback.
Full-frame playback
Multi-frame
playback
100-0001
Playback
zoom
Nine-frame view
Hundred- frame view
DISP/BACK
MENU/OK
Medium zoom
Maximum zoom
218
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Viewing Pictures
Playback Zoom
Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current
picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK or MENU/OK.
N
The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGE
QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE SIZE.
Scroll
When the picture is zoomed in, the focus stick
(focus lever) can be used to view areas of the
image not currently visible in the display.
Navigation window
Multi-Frame Playback
To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear com-
mand dial left when a picture is displayed full frame.
N
•
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight images and press MENU/OK
to view the highlighted image full frame.
•
In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the focus stick up or
down to view more pictures.
219
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
The playback menu is displayed when
you press MENU/OK in playback mode.
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
SWITCH SLOT
PLAY BACK MENU
RAW CONVERSION
ERASE
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
CROP
RESIZE
EXIT
PROTECT
SWITCH SLOT
Choose the card from which images will be played back.
N
If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a but-
ton to choose a card for playback.
220
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
RAW CONVERSION
Even if you don’t have a computer, you can use the camera to
modify RAW pictures and save them in other formats.
Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format
1
Display a RAW picture.
2
Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu.
3
Press MENU/OK.
A list of settings will be displayed.
CREATE
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
FILE TYPE
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING
DYNAMIC RANGE
RAW CONVERSION
CANCEL
4
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a
setting.
5
Press the focus stick right to display
options.
RAW CONVERSION
200
%
400
%
100
%
6
Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the desired option.
7
Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings
list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to
adjust additional settings.
8
Press the Q button.
A preview of the copy will be displayed.
9
Press MENU/OK.
The copy will be saved.
N
RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q but-
ton when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback.
221
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures from
RAW to another format are:
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
Create a copy using the settings in eff ect at the time
the photo was taken.
FILE TYPE Choose a fi le format.
IMAGE SIZE Choose an image size.
IMAGE QUALITY Adjust image quality.
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING Adjust exposure.
DYNAMIC RANGE Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast.
D RANGE PRIORITY
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows
for natural-looking results when photographing
high-contrast scenes.
FILM SIMULATION Simulate the eff ects of diff erent types of fi lm.
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Choose a monochrome tint for photographs tak-
en using FILM SIMULATION> a ACROS and
b MONOCHROME.
GRAIN EFFECT Add a fi lm grain eff ect.
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds,
yellows, and greens.
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
blues.
WHITE BALANCE Adjust white balance.
WB SHIFT Fine-tune white balance.
TONE CURVE Adjust highlights and shadows.
COLOR Adjust color density.
SHARPNESS Sharpen or soften outlines.
HIGH ISO NR Process the copy to reduce mottling.
CLARITY Increase defi nition.
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
Improve defi nition by adjusting for diff raction and
the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
COLOR SPACE Choose the color space used for color reproduction.
HDR MODE Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows.
O
Some settings may be unavailable depending on the options chosen
when the picture was taken.
222
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF.
SELECT IMAGES
Select HEIF pictures for conversion.
FILE FORMAT
Choose a format for the converted pictures.
Options
Options
JPEG TIFF 8bit TIFF 16bit
SELECT SLOT TO RECORD
Choose the memory card to which the converted pictures will
be saved.
Options
Options
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
223
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
ERASE
Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pic-
tures.
O
Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAME Delete pictures one at a time.
SELECTED FRAMES Delete multiple selected pictures.
ALL FRAMES Delete all unprotected pictures.
FRAME
1
Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through
pictures and press MENU/OK to delete.
N
•
A con rmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; be
sure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK.
•
Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press the fo-
cus stick left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to
delete.
224
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
SELECTED FRAMES
1
Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
2
Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select.
•
Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R).
•
To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again.
3
When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display a
con rmation dialog.
4
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pic-
tures.
N
Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S.
ALL FRAMES
1
Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
2
A con rmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and
press MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures.
N
•
Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted
before the button was pressed cannot be recovered.
•
If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a
DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures.
225
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
Taking photos with SEPARATE selected for D SAVE DATA
SET-UP>x CARD SLOT SETTING creates two copies. Choose
whether deleting the RAW image will also delete the JPEG or
HEIF copy.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 also deletes the
JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
OFF
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 does not delete
the JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
CROP
Create a cropped copy of the current picture.
1
Display the desired picture.
2
Select CROP in the playback menu.
3
Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press the
focus stick (focus lever) up, down, left, or right to scroll the
picture until the desired portion is displayed.
4
Press MENU/OK to display a con rmation dialog.
5
Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate
le.
N
•
The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in the
cropped copy.
•
If the size of the nal copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow.
•
All copies have an aspect ratio of 3∶2.
226
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
RESIZE
Create a small copy of the current picture.
1
Display the desired picture.
2
Select RESIZE in the playback menu.
3
Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a con rmation
dialog.
4
Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate
le.
N
The sizes available vary with the size of the original image.
227
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
PROTECT
Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of the
following options and press MENU/OK.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAME
Protect selected pictures. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
Press DISP/BACK when the operation is complete.
SET ALL Protect all pictures.
RESET ALL Remove protection from all pictures.
O
Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.
N
•
Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smart-
phones or tablets removes upload marking.
•
Protection can also be added or removed by pressing the Fn1 button
during playback.
228
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
IMAGE ROTATE
Rotate pictures.
1
Select ON for D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE PB.
2
Display the desired picture.
3
Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu.
4
Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to rotate the picture
90° clockwise, up to rotate it 90° counterclockwise.
5
Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in
the selected orientation whenever it is played back on the
camera.
N
•
Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before ro-
tating pictures.
•
The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with other
devices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated when
viewed on a computer or on other cameras.
•
Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP> AUTOROTATE PB are auto-
matically displayed in the correct orientation during playback.
229
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
VOICE MEMO SETTING
Add a voice memo to the current photograph.
1
Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu.
2
Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo.
3
Press and hold the AFON button to record a voice memo.
Recording ends after 30s or when you release the button.
N
•
The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos.
•
Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures.
•
Deleting the picture also deletes the memo.
Playing Voice Memos
Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback.
•
To play the memo, press the AFON button.
•
A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back.
•
Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and then
pressing the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume.
Press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted us-
ing D SOUND SET-UP> PLAYBACK VOLUME.
230
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
RATING
Rate pictures using stars.
1
Select RATING in the playback menu.
2
Rotate the front command dial to choose a picture and the
rear command dial to choose a rating of from 0 to 5 stars
(“I”).
N
•
The focus stick (focus lever) can be used in place of the front com-
mand dial to choose a picture.
•
The rating dialog can also be displayed by pressing the AEL button in
single-frame, nine-frame, or hundred-frame playback.
•
Use touch controls to zoom in or out.
•
Ratings cannot be applied to:
-
Protected pictures
-
Movies
-
“Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
231
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
COPY
Copy pictures between the cards in the rst and second slots.
1
Select COPY in the playback menu.
2
Highlight one of the following options.
Option
Option
Description
Description
SLOT1 y SLOT2
Copy pictures from the card in the fi rst slot to the card in
the second slot.
SLOT2 y SLOT1
Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the card
in the fi rst slot.
3
Press the focus stick (focus lever) right.
4
Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK.
Option
Option
Description
Description
FRAME
Copy selected pictures. Press the focus stick left or right to
view pictures and press MENU/OK to copy the current picture.
ALL FRAMES Copy all pictures.
O
•
Copying ends when the destination is full.
•
If you attempt to copy a le over 4GB in size to a memory card with
a capacity of 32GB or less, copying will end and the le will not be
copied.
232
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE
Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via
Bluetooth.
N
For information on pairing the camera with a smartphone or tablet, visit:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/
1
Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE> SELECT IMAGE&
TRANSFER.
N
Select RESET to remove “upload to smartphone” marking from all
pictures before proceeding.
2
Mark pictures for upload.
Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK
to mark them for upload.
•
To switch to the memory card in the
other slot or display only pictures
that meet selected criteria, press
DISP/BACK before marking begins.
•
To select all pictures, press the Q but-
ton.
•
Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL button also selects all pictures
between them.
SELECT IMAGE
FRAME
FINISH/SETTINGSELECT
SELECT RANGESELECT ALL
3
Press DISP/BACK and select START
TRANSFER.
The selected pictures will be upload-
ed.
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
233
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot
To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.
•
To display only pictures that meet selected cri-
teria, choose FILTERING.
•
To switch to the memory card in the other slot,
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
FILTERING
START TRANSFER
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
O
Switching slots or changing the lter criteria removes any existing up-
load marking.
N
•
Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.
•
The following cannot be selected for upload:
-
Protected pictures
-
Movies
-
RAW images
-
“Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
•
If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING> Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
continue even while the camera is o .
•
When a SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING> a ISO BUTTON SETTING, the picture-selection di-
alog can be displayed by pressing the ISO button.
234
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest apps. The smartphone
can then be used to:
•
Control the camera and take pictures remotely
•
Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
•
Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-
tures
•
Upload location data to the camera
N
•
For downloads and other information, visit:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
•
If r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION is selected for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING> a ISO BUTTON SETTING, you can connect to the
smartphone using the ISO button.
SLIDE SHOW
View pictures in an automated slide show. Press MENU/OK to start
and press the focus stick (focus lever) right or left to skip ahead
or back. Press DISP/BACK at any time during the show to view on-
screen help. The show can be ended at any time by pressing
MENU/OK.
N
The camera will not turn o automatically while a slide show is in prog-
ress.
235
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST
Create books from your favorite photos.
Creating a Photobook
1
Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU> PHOTOBOOK
ASSIST.
2
Scroll through the images and press the focus stick (focus le-
ver) up to select or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when the
book is complete.
N
•
Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected
for photobooks.
•
The rst picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the fo-
cus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead.
3
Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to se-
lect all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The new
book will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu.
N
•
Books can contain up to 300 pictures.
•
Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted.
236
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Viewing Photobooks
Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK
to display the book, then press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to scroll through the pictures.
Editing and Deleting Photobooks
Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options
will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the on-
screen instructions.
•
EDIT: Edit the book as described in “Creating a Photobook”.
•
ERASE: Delete the book.
237
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
Create a digital “print order” for DPOF-compatible printers.
1
Select C PLAY BACK MENU> PRINT ORDER (DPOF).
2
Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pic-
tures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or
RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before
proceeding.
3
Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the
print order.
4
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up
or down to choose the number of
copies (up to 99).
N
To remove a picture from the order,
press the focus stick down until the
number of copies is 0.
Total number
of prints
Number of copies
N
Repeat steps 3–4 to complete the print order.
5
The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press
MENU/OK to exit.
N
•
The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon
during playback.
•
Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single
memory card.
•
If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-
other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as
described above.
01
PRINT ORDER
(
DPOF
)
SHEETS
SETFRAME
DPOF:
00001
238
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
instax PRINTER PRINT
To print pictures to optional Fuji lm instax SHARE printers, rst
select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/
USB settings menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name
(SSID) and password, then follow the steps below.
1
Turn the printer on.
2
Select C PLAY BACK MENU> instax
PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con-
nect to the printer.
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234
CONNECTING
CANCEL
PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
3
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
display the picture you want to print,
then press MENU/OK. The picture will
be sent to the printer and printing
will start.
100-0020
SET CANCEL
instax-12345678
PRINTER PRINT
N
•
Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
•
The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.
•
The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.
239
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
The Playback Menu
DISP ASPECT
Choose the aspect ratio used for the display of still pictures on
High De nition (HD) devices (this option is available only when
an HDMI cable is connected).
Options
Options
16 : 9 3 : 2
N
Choose 16 : 9 to display photos with an aspect ratio of 3 : 2 full screen.
The pictures will be displayed full screen with tops and bottoms
cropped out.
240
MEMO
241
Network/USB Setting Menus
242
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
Adjust camera network and USB settings.
For more information on the network/USB settings menu, visit:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/
243
The Setup Menus
244
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
Adjust basic camera settings.
To access basic camera settings, press
MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and
choose USER SETTING.
USER SETTING
DATE/TIME
bAREA SETTING
FORMAT
x MY MENU SETTING
F MY MENU SETTING
SENSOR CLEANING
TIME DIFFERENCE
EXIT
a
FORMAT
To format a memory card:
1
Select D USER SETTING> FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab.
2
Highlight the slot containing the card you wish to format and
press MENU/OK.
3
A con rmation dialog will be dis-
played. To format the memory card,
highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
N
To exit without formatting the memory
card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK.
FORMAT CARD IN SLOT 1, OK?
OK
CANCEL
ERASE ALL DATA
FORMAT
O
•
All data—including protected pictures—will be deleted from the
memory card. Be sure important les have been copied to a comput-
er or other storage device.
•
Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting.
N
Format options can also be displayed by holding the selector down
(f) while pressing the b (delete) button.
245
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
b AREA SETTING
Adjust settings for your current time zone.
AREA SETTING
Choose your time zone from a map.
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
Turn daylight saving time on or o .
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON Daylight saving time on.
OFF Daylight saving time off .
DATE/TIME
To set the camera clock:
1
Select D USER SETTING> DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the
year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to
change. To change the order in which the year, month, and
day are displayed, highlight the date format and press the
focus stick up or down.
3
Press MENU/OK to set the clock.
246
The Setup Menus
9
TIME DIFFERENCE
Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone to
the local time at your destination when traveling. To specify the
di erence between your local and home time zone:
O
Use b AREA SETTING to choose your home time zone before select-
ing a local time zone using g LOCAL.
1
Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK.
2
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the local time
zone. Press MENU/OK when settings are complete.
N
Select ON to enable daylight saving time.
To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL and
press MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home time
zone, select h HOME.
Options
Options
g LOCAL h HOME
N
If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about three
seconds when the camera is turned on.
247
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
Qa
Choose a language.
x MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E(MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-
tom menu of frequently-used photo menu options (P 287).
F MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E(MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-
tom menu of frequently-used movie menu options (P 287).
248
The Setup Menus
9
SENSOR CLEANING
Remove dust from the camera image sensor.
Option
Option
Description
Description
OK Clean the sensor immediately.
WHEN SWITCHED ON
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is
turned on.
WHEN SWITCHED OFF
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns
off (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the cam-
era turns off in playback mode).
N
Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed
using a blower (P 356).
BATTERY AGE
Check battery age. Age is expressed as a
number between 0 and 4. The higher the
number, the older the battery.
BATTERY AGE
N
The older the battery, the faster it loses its charge. We recommend that
batteries be replaced as they wear out.
249
The Setup Menus
9
USER SETTING
RESET
Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values.
1
Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STILL MENU RESET
Reset all photo menu settings other than custom white
balance and custom settings banks created using
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
MOVIE MENU RESET
Reset all movie menu settings other than custom white
balance and custom settings banks created using
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
SET-UP RESET
Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME,
b AREA SETTING, TIME DIFFERENCE, and
COPYRIGHT INFO to default values.
INITIALIZE
Reset all settings other than custom white balance to
default values.
2
A con rmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and
press MENU/OK.
REGULATORY
To view electronic copies of the product model number, and
other certi cates, select D USER SETTING> REGULATORY in the
setup menu.
250
The Setup Menus
9
SOUND SETTING
Make changes to camera sounds.
To access sound settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SOUND SET-UP.
EXIT
SOUND SETTING
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
AF BEEP VOL.
OPERATION VOL.
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
PLAYBACK VOLUME
AF BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera
focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer
is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
251
The Setup Menus
9
SOUND SETTING
OPERATION VOL.
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera con-
trols are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical or
electronic front-curtain shutter.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the mechanical or electronic
front-curtain shutter.
Options
Options
i SOUND 1 j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3
252
The Setup Menus
9
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic
shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound.
Options
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter.
Options
Options
i SOUND 1 j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3
PLAYBACK VOLUME
Adjust the volume for movie playback.
Options
Options
012345678910
253
The Setup Menus
9
SOUND SETTING
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
Adjust audio settings for use when viewing 4ch movies.
Option
Option
Description
Description
XLR
The camera plays audio recorded via external micro-
phones connected via the XLR microphone adapter.
CAMERA
The camera plays audio recorded via the camera’s built-in
microphone or external microphones connected via the
microphone jack.
N
You can also switch sources while viewing the playback display by
pressing the center of the focus stick (focus lever).
254
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
Make changes to display settings.
To access display settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SCREEN SET-UP.
SCREEN SETTING
EVF COLOR
VIEW MODE SETTING
EVF BRIGHTNESS
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
LCD BRIGHTNESS
LCD COLOR
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE DISP.
EXIT
VIEW MODE SETTING
Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic view nder), or LCD
monitor view modes (P 18).
EVF BRIGHTNESS
Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic view nder.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AUTO
The camera automatically adjusts brightness around a selected
level in response to changes in ambient lighting conditions.
MANUAL
Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between −7
and +5.
EVF COLOR
Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic view nder.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
255
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the electronic view nder.
1
Adjust colors using the focus stick
(focus lever).
SET CANCEL
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
2
Press MENU/OK.
256
The Setup Menus
9
LCD BRIGHTNESS
Adjust monitor brightness.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
LCD COLOR
Adjust monitor saturation.
Options
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor.
1
Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever).
2
Press MENU/OK.
257
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
IMAGE DISP.
Choose how long images are displayed after shooting.
Option
Option
Description
Description
CONTINUOUS
Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the
shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus
point, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever); press again
to cancel zoom.
1.5 SEC
Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
0.5 SEC
OFF Pictures are not displayed after shooting.
N
•
Colors may di er slightly from those in the nal image.
•
“Noise” mottling may be visible at high sensitivities.
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
Choose whether the indicators in the view nder and LCD monitor
rotate to match camera orientation.
Options
Options
ON OFF
258
The Setup Menus
9
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview
in manual exposure mode.
Option
Option
Description
Description
PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview.
PREVIEW WB
Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in
which exposure is likely to change during shooting, as may be
the case when you use a fl ash during daylight.
OFF
Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this op-
tion in situations in which both exposure and white balance
are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when
you use a fl ash with an incandescent monitoring lamp.
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
Choose whether the e ects of lm simulation, white balance,
and other settings are visible in the monitor.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
The eff ects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor,
but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hard-
to-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will diff er from
those in the fi nal picture. The display will however be adjusted
to show the eff ects of monochrome and sepia settings.
OFF
The eff ects of fi lm simulation, white balance, and other settings
can be previewed in the monitor.
260
The Setup Menus
9
FRAMING GUIDELINE
Choose a framing grid for shooting mode.
Option
Option
F GRID 9 G GRID 24 H HD FRAMING
Display
P P
P
For “rule of thirds” compo-
sition.
A six-by-four grid. Frame HD pictures in the
crop shown by the lines at
the top and bottom of the
display.
N
Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayed
using D SCREEN SET-UP> DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 23).
261
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
AUTOROTATE PB
Choose ON to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation)
pictures during playback.
Options
Options
ON OFF
FOCUS SCALE UNITS
Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator.
Options
Options
METERS FEET
APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS
Choose whether the camera displays aperture as a T-number
(used for movie camera lenses) or an f/-number (used for still
camera lenses) when an optional FUJINON MKX-series lens is
attached. For information on using cinema lenses, see the docu-
mentation provided with the lens.
Option
Option
Description
Description
T NUMBER
A measure of lens aperture commonly used by cinematogra-
phers. Lens transmittance is taken into account to better cal-
culate exposure.
F NUMBER
A measure of lens aperture commonly used by photographers.
Lens transmittance is assumed to be 100%, meaning that the
same aperture may produce diff erent exposures depending on
the lens.
262
The Setup Menus
9
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING
Choose the content of the two windows in the dual display.
Option
Option
Description
Description
R:FOCUS L:FRAME
The right (small) window shows a close-up of the focus area,
while the left (large) window shows the entire frame.
R:FRAME L:FOCUS
The right (small) window shows the entire frame, while the left
(large) window shows a close-up of the focus area.
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display
(P 23).
263
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)
Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic view nd-
er. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN
SET-UP> LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.
OFF ON
O
Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 15).
N
If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the
button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and o (OFF) (P 295).
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)
Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The in-
dicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.
OFF ON
O
Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 17).
N
If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the
button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and o (OFF) (P 295).
264
The Setup Menus
9
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed when
ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP>
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD).
R2
R1
L4
L3
L2
L1
Scale
Expo. DISP.
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
A
Expo. DISP.
Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display.
Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to
deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK.
B
d Scale
Select ON to display the exposure indicator.
C
L1, L2, L3, L4
Choose up to four large icons for display on the left side
of the screen.
D
R1, R2, R3, R4
Choose up to four large icons for display on the right
side of the screen.
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
Adjust display contrast.
Option
Option
Description
Description
HIGH CONTRAST High contrast.
STANDARD Normal contrast.
LOW CONTRAST Low contrast.
DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting.
265
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
LOCATION INFO
Select ON to display location info downloaded from a smart-
phone.
Options
Options
ON OFF
SUB MONITOR SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed in the secondary LCD monitor.
Separate displays are available for still photography and movie
recording.
1
Select D SCREEN SET-UP> SUB MONITOR SETTING in the
setup menu.
2
Highlight STILL MODE or MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.
3
Highlight the indicator you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
SUB MONITOR SETTING(STILL)
EXPO. COMP.
APERTURE
SHUTTER SPEED
ISO
SHOOTING MODE
FILM SIMULATION
WHITE BALANCE
IMAGE SIZE
266
The Setup Menus
9
4
Highlight the indicator you wish to
display and press MENU/OK.
ISO
MOVIE MODE
FRAMES REM.
REC. TIME
NONE
APERTURE
SHUTTER SPEED
EXPO. COMP.
DISPLAY 1 SETTING
Choose from:
•
SHUTTER SPEED
•
APERTURE
•
EXPO. COMP.
•
ISO
•
MOVIE MODE
•
FRAMES REM.
•
REC. TIME
•
SHOOTING MODE
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
DRIVE MODE
•
FOCUS MODE
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
IMAGE SIZE
•
IMAGE QUALITY
•
BATTERY LEVEL
•
CARD SLOT OPTIONS
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
CONNECTION STATUS
•
NONE
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to change additional indicators.
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR
Adjusting the background color of the secondary LCD monitor
according to lighting conditions makes the display easier to read.
Option
Option
Description
Description
BLACK Recommended for use with dark ambient lighting.
WHITE Recommended for use with bright ambient lighting.
N
The background is displayed in white when the secondary LCD moni-
tor backlight is on.
267
The Setup Menus
9
SCREEN SETTING
x Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during still photography.
Options
Options
TRANSPARENT BLACK
F Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during movie recording.
Options
Options
TRANSPARENT BLACK
268
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
Access options for camera controls.
To access control options, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING.
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
o S.S OPERATION
EXIT
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
Choose the functions performed by pressing the center of the
focus stick (focus lever) or by pressing the stick up, down, left, or
right.
PUSH
Option
Option
Description
Description
OFF Pressing the center of the stick has no eff ect.
EDIT FOCUS AREA
Press the center of the stick to choose the focus area size.
If g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECT
DETECTION SETTING is on, you can instead position the
focus frame over the desired face, eye, animal, or object.
ZOOM
Press the center of the stick to zoom in on the active focus
area (P 99).
RESET TO CENTER Press the center of the stick to select the center focus area.
TILT o
Option
Option
Description
Description
OFF Pressing the stick up, down, left, or right has no eff ect.
DIRECT AF POINT
SELECTION
Choose the focus area without leaving the shooting display.
EDIT FOCUS AREA
Press the stick up, down, left, or right to view a focus-area
display and choose the focus area.
269
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
x
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still pho-
tography (P 289).
F
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when lming
movies (P 289).
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons (P 295).
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons available on
some power zoom lenses (P 304).
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING
Choose the roles played by the up, down, left, and right buttons
on the selector.
Option
Option
Description
Description
Fn BUTTON The selector buttons serve as function buttons.
FOCUS AREA The selector buttons can be used to position the focus area.
N
Selecting FOCUS AREA prevents you accessing the functions assigned
to the function buttons.
270
The Setup Menus
9
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
Choose whether to reverse the roles played by the front and rear
command dials in each of the following modes.
Option
Option
Description
Description
P
Reverse the dials used for program shift and exposure compen-
sation in mode P (program AE).
S
Reverse the dials used for shutter-speed selection and exposure
compensation in mode S (shutter-priority AE).
A
Reverse the dials used for aperture selection and exposure
compensation in mode A (aperture-priority AE).
M
Reverse the dials used for shutter-speed and aperture selection
in mode M (manual).
o S.S OPERATION
Select OFF to disable shutter-speed ne-tuning using the com-
mand dials.
Options
Options
ON OFF
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
Choose the direction in which the command dials are rotated to
choose values. Settings for the front and rear command dials can
be adjusted separately.
Option
Option
Description
Description
- ––––– +
Rotate the dial right for higher values or to move to the next
item.
+ ––––– - Rotate the dial left for higher values or to move to the next item.
271
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
SHUTTER AF
Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AF-S
•
ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
•
OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter but-
ton is pressed halfway.
AF-C
•
ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
•
OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter but-
ton is pressed halfway.
SHUTTER AE
If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button is
pressed halfway. The setting for focus mode CONTINUOUS AF
(AF-C) can be adjusted separately from that for modes SINGLE
AF (AF-S) and MANUAL FOCUS.
Options
Options
ON OFF
N
Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shot
taken in burst mode.
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS
Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is at-
tached.
Options
Options
ON OFF
272
The Setup Menus
9
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD
Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory
card inserted in the camera.
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released to
test camera function and the shooting and setup menus can be
displayed.
OFF
The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing
accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card.
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING
Adjust settings for compatible lenses with focus rings or power zoom.
FOCUS RING ROTATE
Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to in-
crease the focus distance.
Options
Options
X CW (clockwise) Y CCW (counterclockwise)
FOCUS RING OPERATION
Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the move-
ment of the focus ring.
Option
Option
Description
Description
NONLINEAR Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated.
LINEAR
Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is rotated,
but the focusing speed is unaff ected by the speed the ring is rotated.
F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (Fn)
Choose the rate at which the focus distance changes when adjust-
ed using function buttons during manual focus with compatible
power zoom lenses. The higher the number, the higher the rate.
Options
Options
1(SLOW) 2345678(FAST)
273
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (Fn)
Choose the rate at which compatible power zoom lenses can be
zoomed in or out using function buttons. The higher the number, the
higher the rate.
Options
Options
1(SLOW) 2345678(FAST)
CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM/FOCUS (Fn) OPERATION
Choose whether the function buttons on compatible power
zoom lenses need only be pressed once to start and stop power
focus or power zoom.
Option
Option
Description
Description
START/STOP
SWITCH
The operation starts when the button is pressed and stops when
it is pressed a second time.
ACTIVE WHILE
PRESSING
The operation continues while the button is pressed and stops
when the button is released.
ZOOM RING ROTATE
Choose whether to reverse the rotation of the zoom ring on com-
patible power zoom lenses.
Options
Options
X CW (clockwise) Y CCW (counterclockwise)
ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
Choose role played by the zoom/focus control ring on compati-
ble power zoom lenses.
Options
Options
ZOOM FOCUS
274
The Setup Menus
9
AE/AF-LOCK MODE
This option determines the behavior of the button to which
exposure and/or focus lock is assigned.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AE&AF ON WHEN
PRESSING
Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed.
AE&AF ON/OFF
SWITCH
Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and re-
main locked until it is pressed again.
AWB-LOCK MODE
Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white
balance (AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white
balance at the value metered by the camera when WA WHITE
PRIORITY, AUTO, or AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY is selected for
white balance.
Option
Option
Description
Description
AWB ON WHEN
PRESSING
Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed.
AWB ON/OFF
SWITCH
Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end
the lock.
275
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
a ISO BUTTON SETTING
Choose the role performed by the ISO button during playback.
Option
Option
Description
Description
a SMARTPHONE
TRANSFER ORDER
Pressing the button displays a dialog where pictures can be
selected for upload to a smartphone with which the camera
is paired (P 232). If the camera is not currently paired with
a smartphone, Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING options
will be displayed instead.
b FTP
TRANSFER ORDER
Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload to an
FTP server.
c FTP PRIORITY
TRANSFER ORDER
Pressing the button marks the current picture for priority upload
to an FTP server. The picture will be moved to the head of the
upload queue.
r WIRELESS
COMMUNICATION
The button can be used for wireless connections.
N
b FTP TRANSFER ORDER and c FTP PRIORITY TRANSFER
ORDER can only be used when an optional FT-XH le transmitter is
connected.
276
The Setup Menus
9
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Enable or disable touch-screen controls.
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting.
OFF Touch controls disabled.
x DOUBLE TAP SETTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your subject during
shooting.
OFF Touch zoom disabled.
c TOUCH FUNCTION
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON Enable touch-function gestures.
OFF Disable touch-function gestures.
TOUCH ZOOM
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON
If the lens supports touch zoom, you can zoom in and out by
touching the LCD monitor (P 35).
OFF Touch zoom disabled.
277
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Option
Option
Description
Description
ON The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback.
OFF Touch controls disabled.
EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls while
the view nder is active. The area used for touch controls can be
selected from:
Option
Option
Description
Description
6
All.
0
Right half.
2
Top right quarter.
4
Bottom right quarter.
1
Left half.
3
Top left quarter.
5
Bottom left quarter.
OFF Touch controls disabled.
278
The Setup Menus
9
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
LOCK
Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation.
Option
Option
Description
Description
LOCK SETTING
Choose from the following:
•
UNLOCK: Reset lock options.
•
ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTION
SELECTION list.
•
SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in
the FUNCTION SELECTION list.
FUNCTION
SELECTION
Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION is
chosen for LOCK SETTING.
N
The controls selected using SELECTED FUNCTION can be locked at any
time during shooting by pressing and holding MENU/OK. To unlock the
controls, press and hold the button again.
279
The Setup Menus
9
POWER MANAGEMENT
Adjust power management settings.
To access power management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,
and choose POWER MANAGEMENT.
POWER MANAGEMENT
AUTO POWER OFF
PERFORMANCE
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
EXIT
AUTO POWER OFF
Choose the length of time before the camera turns o automati-
cally when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase
battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned o
manually.
Options
Options
5 MIN 2 MIN 1 MIN 30 SEC 15 SEC OFF
PERFORMANCE
Select BOOST to improve focus and view nder display perfor-
mance.
Option
Option
Description
Description
BOOST
Boost camera focus and viewfi nder display performance.
The battery drains faster than when is NORMAL selected.
NORMAL
Choose for standard focus and viewfi nder display perfor-
mance and battery endurance.
ECONOMY
Limit autofocus and viewfi nder performance. This option
off ers better battery endurance than does NORMAL.
280
The Setup Menus
9
POWER MANAGEMENT
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
Adjust the behavior of the EVF and LCD monitor when BOOST is
selected for PERFORMANCE.
Option
Option
Description
Description
EVF/LCD LOW LIGHT
PRIORITY
Display brightness is adjusted to make subjects in shad-
ows easier to see. Motion blur may cause ghosting.
EVF/LCD RESOLUTION
PRIORITY
Display resolution is increased to make details easier to
see.
EVF FRAME RATE
PRIORITY (120P)
The refresh rate for the EVF is increased, smoothing mo-
tion.
EVF FRAME RATE
PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.)
The refresh rate for the EVF is increased beyond EVF
FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) smoothing motion
still further. The EVF may darken.
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
If its temperature rises beyond a certain point, the camera will rst
display a message and then, if the temperature rise continues, auto-
matically end shooting and power down. Choose the temperature
at which the camera turns o automatically.
Option
Option
Description
Description
STANDARD
The camera turns off automatically when its temperature
reaches the STANDARD value.
HIGH
Shooting can continue at temperatures higher than
the STANDARD value, extending the time available to
record movies and the like. Because remaining in contact
with the camera at these high temperatures could result
in low-temperature burns, this option should only be
used after mounting the camera on a tripod or taking
other steps to avoid prolonged contact with the camera.
281
The Setup Menus
9
SAVE DATA SETTING
Make changes to le management settings.
To access le management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,
and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP.
SAVE DATA SETTING
FRAME NO.
EXIT
xCARD SLOT SETTING
EDIT FILE NAME
SELECT FOLDER
DEFAULT CAPTION
GEOTAGGING
COPYRIGHT INFO
SELECT SLOT(x SEQUENTIAL)
FRAME NO.
New pictures are stored in image les named
using a four-digit le number assigned by
adding one to the last le number used. The
le number is displayed during playback as
shown. FRAME NO. controls whether le num-
bering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or
the current memory card is formatted.
Option
Option
Description
Description
CONTINUOUS
Numbering continues from the last fi le number used or the fi rst
available fi le number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to
reduce the number of pictures with duplicate fi le names.
RENEW
Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a new
memory card is inserted.
N
•
If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will be
disabled. Turn the camera o and insert a formatted memory card
before resuming shooting.
•
Selecting
D
USER SETTING> RESET sets FRAME NO. to
CONTINUOUS but does not reset the le number.
•
Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may di er.
Frame number
Directory
number
File
number
282
The Setup Menus
9
EDIT FILE NAME
Change the le name pre x. sRGB images use a four-letter pre x
(default “DSCF”), Adobe RGB images a three-letter pre x (“DSF”)
preceded by an underscore.
Option
Option
Default pre x
Default pre x
Sample le name
Sample le name
sRGB DSCF ABCD0001
AdobeRGB _DSF _ABC0001
x CARD SLOT SETTING
Choose the role played by the card in the second slot.
Option
Option
Description
Description
SEQUENTIAL
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the
fi rst slot is full.
BACKUP Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
SEPARATE
RAW pictures will be saved to the card in the fi rst slot and JPEG
or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This option only
takes eff ect when FINE+RAW or NORMAL+RAW is selected
for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING> IMAGE QUALITY.
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
Choose the card that is recorded to rst when SEQUENTIAL is
selected for x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Options
Options
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
283
The Setup Menus
9
SAVE DATA SETTING
SELECT FOLDER
Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent
pictures.
Option
Option
Description
Description
SELECT FOLDER
To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be
stored, press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to
highlight an existing folder and press MENU/OK.
CREATE FOLDER
Enter a fi ve-character folder name. The new folder will be
created with the next picture you take and subsequent
pictures will be stored in that folder.
COPYRIGHT INFO
Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to
new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information
are re ected only in images taken after the changes are made.
Option
Option
Description
Description
DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information.
ENTER AUTHOR’S INFO Enter the creator’s name.
ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder.
DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO
Delete the current copyright information. This change applies
only to images taken after this option is selected; copyright
information recorded with existing images is not aff ected.
284
The Setup Menus
9
SAVE DATA SETTING
DEFAULT CAPTION
Choose the caption applied to new photos and movies.
DISPLAY
View the current caption.
EDIT
Enter a caption.
ERASE
Delete the current caption.
GEOTAGGING
If ON is selected, location data downloaded from a smartphone
will be embedded in pictures as they are taken.
Options
Options
ON OFF
285
Shortcuts
286
Shortcuts
10
Shortcut Options
Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation.
Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a cus-
tom “my” menu or assigned to a function button or touch-func-
tion gesture for direct access:
Shortcut Option
Shortcut Option
Description
Description
P
P
“My menu”
Add frequently-used options to this custom menu,
which can be viewed by pressing MENU/OK and se-
lecting the E (“MY MENU”) tab.
287
The Quick Menu
The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Q button.
Use the Q menu to view or change the options se-
lected for frequently-used menu items.
289
The function buttons
Use the function buttons for direct access to select-
ed features.
295
Touch-function
gestures
Use touch function button fl ick gestures (T-Fn1,
T-Fn2, T-Fn3, and T-Fn4) for direct access to selected
features.
301
Lens function buttons
Use the function buttons on the lens (if any) for di-
rect access to selected features.
304
287
Shortcuts
10
MY MENU
Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options.
To display “my menu”, press MENU/OK in the
shooting display and select the
E
(MY
MENU) tab.
SELF-TIMER
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
FILM SIMULATION
GRAIN EFFECT
PHOTOMETRY
SHUTTER TYPE
IS MODE
gFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
MY MENU
EXIT
O
The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to
MY MENU.
MY MENU SETTING
To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:
1
In the setup menu, select D USER
SETTING> x MY MENU SETTING or
F MY MENU SETTING.
N
To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS.
To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS.
MY MENU SETTING
ADD ITEMS
REMOVE ITEMS
RANK ITEMS
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up
or down to highlight ADD ITEMS and
press MENU/OK. Options that can be
added to “my menu” are highlighted
in blue.
IMAGE QUALITY
MY MENU SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
SELECT CANCEL
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
FILM SIMULATION
N
Items currently in “my menu” are indicated by check marks.
288
Shortcuts
10
MY MENU
3
Choose a position for the item and
press MENU/OK. The item will be added
to “my menu”.
MOVE SAVE
1 IMAGE SIZE
2
IMAGE QUALITY
SELECT ITEM LOCATION
4
Press MENU/OK to return to the edit display.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired items have been
added.
N
“My menu” can contain up to 16 items.
289
Shortcuts
10
The Quick Menu
Use the quick menu for quick access to selected options. To
view the quick menu, press the Qbutton.
The Quick Menu Display
The quick menu o ers di erent options in photo and movie
modes. At default settings, it contains the following items:
Still photography
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSET
SHOOTING MODE
Default
Default
A
A
SHOOTING MODE
I
I
HIGHLIGHT TONE
B
B
FOCUS MODE
J
SHADOW TONE
C
C
AF MODE
K
COLOR
D
DYNAMIC RANGE
L
SHARPNESS
E
HIGH ISO NR
M
SELF-TIMER
F
IMAGE SIZE
N
g FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING
G
G
IMAGE QUALITY
O
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
H
H
FILM SIMULATION
P
EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B
–
P
, which can be changed.
290
Shortcuts
10
Movie recording
SHOOTING MODE
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSET
Default
Default
A
A
SHOOTING MODE
E
E
APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZED
CONTROL oL)
B
B
SHUTTER SPEED
F
F
F ISO
C
C
MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/
ASPECT RATIO
G
G
MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
D
F WHITE BALANCE
H
H
F WHITE BALANCE COLOR
TEMP. (WHEN k SELECTED)
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B
–
H
, which can be changed.
291
Shortcuts
10
The Quick Menu
Viewing and Changing Settings
1
Press Q to display the quick menu
during shooting.
2
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
highlight items and rotate the rear
command dial to change.
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSET
SHOOTING MODE
N
To jump to the x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING or F EDIT/
SAVE CUSTOM SETTING menu, press and hold the Q button
when the quick menu is displayed.
3
Press Q to exit when settings are complete.
N
•
The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls.
•
Using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING, you
can assign the Q button roles normally reserved for the function
buttons or assign the Q button’s default role to a function button
(P 295).
•
To disable the Q(quick menu) button, select NONE for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING> Q BUTTON SETTING.
292
Shortcuts
10
Editing the Quick Menu
To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:
1
Press and hold the Q button during
shooting.
N
The camera displays the photo quick menu during still photogra-
phy and the movie quick menu when in movie mode.
2
The current quick menu will be displayed; use the focus stick
(focus lever) to highlight the item you wish to change and
press MENU/OK.
3
Highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
The following can be assigned to the quick menu.
N
The quick menus can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING>
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU or F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.
293
Shortcuts
10
The Quick Menu
Available Items (Still Photography)
Choose from:
•
IMAGE SIZE
•
IMAGE QUALITY
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
GRAIN EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
D RANGE PRIORITY
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHENk SELECTED)
•
HIGHLIGHT TONE
•
SHADOW TONE
•
COLOR
•
SHARPNESS
•
CLARITY
•
HIGH ISO NR
•
FOCUS MODE
•
AF MODE
•
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
•
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
•
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
•
MF ASSIST
•
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
•
SELF-TIMER
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLICKER REDUCTION
•
ISO
•
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
•
FLASH COMPENSATION
•
MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
RATIO
•
MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
•
BIT RATE
•
HIGH SPEED REC
•
F IS MODE
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
•
EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
•
EVF/LCD COLOR
•
NONE
N
To disable the function button, choose NONE.
294
Shortcuts
10
The Quick Menu
Available Items (Movies)
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
F WHITE BALANCE
•
F WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHENk SELECTED)
•
HIGHLIGHT TONE
•
SHADOW TONE
•
COLOR
•
SHARPNESS
•
HIGH ISO NR
•
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
•
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
•
MF ASSIST
•
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
MOVIE ISO
•
MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
RATIO
•
MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
•
BIT RATE
•
HIGH SPEED REC
•
FOCUS MODE
•
MOVIE AF MODE
•
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
•
F IS MODE
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
SHUTTER SPEED
•
APERTURE
(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
•
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
•
EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
•
EVF/LCD COLOR
•
NONE
N
To disable the function button, choose NONE.
295
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
Assign a role to each function button or touch-function
gesture for quick access to the selected feature.
The Function Buttons
Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the se-
lected feature.
Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:
Back-of-Camera Function Buttons
Back-of-Camera Function Buttons
Function buttons
Function buttons
Default
Default
A
AFON button
AFON button AF-ON
B
AEL (exposure lock) button
AEL (exposure lock) button AE LOCK ONLY
C
Q (quick menu) button
Q (quick menu) button QUICK MENU
296
Shortcuts
10
Front-of-Camera Function Buttons
Front-of-Camera Function Buttons
Function buttons
Function buttons
Default
Default
A
ISO button
ISO button ISO
B
VIEW MODE button
VIEW MODE button VIEW MODE SETTING
C
WB button
WB button WHITE BALANCE
D
t
t
(movie recording) button
(movie recording) button
MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
E
Fn1 button
Fn1 button FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
F
Fn2 button
Fn2 button ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
G
Fn3 button
Fn3 button FOCUS MODE
297
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
The Selector
The Selector
Function buttons
Function buttons
Default
Default
A
Fn4 button
Fn4 button PHOTOMETRY
B
Fn6 button
Fn6 button SHUTTER TYPE
C
Fn7 button
Fn7 button PERFORMANCE
D
Fn5 button
Fn5 button FILM SIMULATION
298
Shortcuts
10
Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons
The roles played by the function buttons can be selected using
the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING op-
tion in the setup menu.
•
d WHEN SET TO B(ON/OFF SWITCH)
•
IMAGE SIZE
•
IMAGE QUALITY
•
RAW
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
GRAIN EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
D RANGE PRIORITY
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
CLARITY
•
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
•
FOCUS AREA
•
FOCUS CHECK
•
FOCUS MODE
•
AF MODE
•
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
•
FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
•
RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
•
SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
•
AF RANGE LIMITER
•
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
•
SPORTS FINDER MODE
•
PRE-SHOT sJ
•
SELF-TIMER
•
AE BKT SETTING
•
FOCUS BKT SETTING
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLICKER REDUCTION
•
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
•
ISO
•
IS MODE
•
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
•
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
•
TTL-LOCK
•
MODELING FLASH
•
MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
•
HIGH SPEED REC
•
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
ZEBRA SETTING
•
COOLING FAN SETTING
•
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
•
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
•
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
•
VIEW MODE SETTING
•
EVF/LCD SWITCH
•
PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
•
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
•
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
•
HISTOGRAM
•
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
•
LARGE INDICATORS MODE
•
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
•
COMMAND DIAL LOCK
299
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
•
ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
•
CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)
•
CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)
•
F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (N)
•
F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (F)
•
AE LOCK ONLY
•
AF LOCK ONLY
•
AE/AF LOCK
•
AF-ON
•
AWB LOCK ONLY
•
LOCK SETTING
•
PERFORMANCE
•
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
•
Bluetooth ON/OFF
•
QUICK MENU
•
PLAYBACK
•
NONE
N
To disable the function button, choose NONE.
300
Shortcuts
10
AF-ON
Controls to which AF-ON is assigned can be used for autofocus.
MODELING FLASH
If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mount-
ed ash unit is attached, you can press the control to test- re the
ash and check for shadows and the like (modeling ash).
TTL-LOCK
If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock ash
output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING>
TTL-LOCK MODE (P 176).
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
Controls to which RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING has been as-
signed can be pressed to temporarily recall the settings saved to
position C1 (CUSTOM 1) on the mode dial. Pressing the button a
second time restores the previous settings.
301
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
Touch-Function Gestures
Assign roles to touch-function gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, or T-Fn4)
for quick access to selected features.
N
Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-func-
tion gestures, select ON for DBUTTON/DIAL SETTING> TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING> c TOUCH FUNCTION.
Touch-Function Gesture Defaults
The default assignments for the di erent gestures are:
Touch-Function Gestures
Touch-Function Gestures
Default
Default
A
T-Fn1 ( ick up)
T-Fn1 ( ick up) HISTOGRAM
B
T-Fn2 ( ick left)
T-Fn2 ( ick left) PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
C
T-Fn3 ( ick right)
T-Fn3 ( ick right) LARGE INDICATORS MODE
D
T-Fn4 ( ick down)
T-Fn4 ( ick down) ZEBRA SETTING
302
Shortcuts
10
Assigning Roles to Touch-Function Gestures
The roles played by touch-function gestures can be selected us-
ing the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
option in the setup menu.
•
IMAGE SIZE
•
IMAGE QUALITY
•
RAW
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
GRAIN EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
D RANGE PRIORITY
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
CLARITY
•
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
•
FOCUS AREA
•
FOCUS CHECK
•
FOCUS MODE
•
AF MODE
•
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
•
FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
•
RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
•
SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
•
AF RANGE LIMITER
•
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
•
SPORTS FINDER MODE
•
PRE-SHOT sJ
•
SELF-TIMER
•
AE BKT SETTING
•
FOCUS BKT SETTING
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLICKER REDUCTION
•
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
•
ISO
•
IS MODE
•
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
•
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
•
TTL-LOCK
•
MODELING FLASH
•
HIGH SPEED REC
•
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
ZEBRA SETTING
•
COOLING FAN SETTING
•
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
•
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
•
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
•
VIEW MODE SETTING
•
EVF/LCD SWITCH
•
PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
•
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
•
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
•
HISTOGRAM
•
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
•
LARGE INDICATORS MODE
•
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
•
COMMAND DIAL LOCK
•
ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
•
LOCK SETTING
•
PERFORMANCE
•
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
303
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
•
Bluetooth ON/OFF
•
QUICK MENU
•
PLAYBACK
•
NONE
N
To disable touch-function gestures, choose NONE.
304
Shortcuts
10
Lens Function Buttons
Choose the roles played by the function buttons on the lens
(where applicable).
Lens Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:
N
A XF18-120mmF4 LM PZ WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.
Lens function button
Lens function button
Default
Default
A
Z/F
Z/F ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
B
L-Fn1 (rocker zoom button pressed up)
L-Fn1 (rocker zoom button pressed up) CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)
C
L-Fn2 (rocker zoom button pressed down)
L-Fn2 (rocker zoom button pressed down) CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)
305
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
Assigning Roles to the Lens Function Buttons
The roles played by the lens function buttons can be selected
using the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> POWER ZOOM LENS
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu.
•
d WHEN SET TO B(ON/OFF SWITCH)
•
IMAGE SIZE
•
IMAGE QUALITY
•
RAW
•
FILM SIMULATION
•
GRAIN EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
•
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
D RANGE PRIORITY
•
WHITE BALANCE
•
CLARITY
•
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
•
FOCUS AREA
•
FOCUS CHECK
•
FOCUS MODE
•
AF MODE
•
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
•
FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
•
RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
•
SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
•
AF RANGE LIMITER
•
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
•
SPORTS FINDER MODE
•
PRE-SHOT sJ
•
SELF-TIMER
•
AE BKT SETTING
•
FOCUS BKT SETTING
•
PHOTOMETRY
•
SHUTTER TYPE
•
FLICKER REDUCTION
•
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
•
ISO
•
IS MODE
•
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
•
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
•
TTL-LOCK
•
MODELING FLASH
•
MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
•
HIGH SPEED REC
•
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
•
F IS MODE BOOST
•
ZEBRA SETTING
•
COOLING FAN SETTING
•
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
•
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
•
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
•
VIEW MODE SETTING
•
EVF/LCD SWITCH
•
PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
•
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
•
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
•
HISTOGRAM
•
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
•
LARGE INDICATORS MODE
•
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
•
COMMAND DIAL LOCK
306
Shortcuts
10
Function Controls
•
ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
•
CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)
•
CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)
•
F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (N)
•
F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (F)
•
AE LOCK ONLY
•
AF LOCK ONLY
•
AE/AF LOCK
•
AF-ON
•
AWB LOCK ONLY
•
LOCK SETTING
•
PERFORMANCE
•
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
•
Bluetooth ON/OFF
•
QUICK MENU
•
PLAYBACK
•
NONE
N
•
To disable the function button, choose NONE.
•
Selected function lock is not available when CONSTANT SPEED
ZOOM (T) or CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W) is assigned to a lens
function button (P 278).
307
Peripherals and Optional
Accessories
308
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Lenses
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
Lens Parts
A
Lens hood
B
Mounting marks
C
Focus ring
D
Zoom ring
E
Aperture ring
F
O.I.S. switch
G
Aperture mode switch
H
Lens signal contacts
I
Front lens cap
J
Rear lens cap
N
A XF18-55mmF2.8-4 R LM OIS lens is used here for illustrative purposes.
309
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Lenses
Lens Care
•
Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry
cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently
with a piece of Fuji lm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning uid has been applied.
•
Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use.
Removing Lens Caps
Remove lens caps as shown.
O
Lens caps may di er from those shown.
310
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Attaching Lens Hoods
When attached, lens hoods reduce glare
and protect the front lens element.
311
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Lenses
Lenses with Aperture Rings
At settings other than A, you can adjust
aperture by rotating the lens aperture
ring (exposure modes A and M).
A161185.64
2.8
A161185.64
Aperture ring
N
•
Selecting ON for MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL disables the
aperture ring.
•
When the aperture ring is set to A, rotate the command dials to adjust
aperture.
The Aperture Mode Switch
If the lens has an aperture mode switch, aper-
ture can be adjusted manually by sliding the
switch to Z and rotating the aperture ring.
Aperture ring
Aperture mode switch
312
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Lenses with No Aperture Rings
Aperture can be adjusted using the front
command dial in modes A (aperture-pri-
ority AE) and M (manual).
N
Aperture control can be reassigned to the rear command dial using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
Lenses with O.I.S. Switches
If the lens supports optical image sta-
bilization (O.I.S.), the image stabiliza-
tion mode can be chosen in the camera
menus. To activate image stabilization,
slide the O.I.S. switch to ON.
O.I.S. switch
313
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Lenses
Manual Focus Lenses
Slide the focus ring to the front for auto-
focus.
For manual focus, slide the focus ring to
the back and rotate it while checking the
results in the camera display. The focus
distance and depth-of- eld indicators
can be used to assist manual focus.
O
Note that manual focus may not be available in all shooting modes.
The Depth-of-Field Indicator
The depth-of- eld indicator shows the approxi-
mate depth of eld (the distance in front of and
behind the focus point that appears to be in
focus). The indicator is displayed in lm format.
314
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Lenses
Power Zoom Lenses
Zoom can be adjusted on power zoom lenses using the zoom/
focus control ring, zoom button, or zoom ring.
O
Adjusting zoom while the lens is wet makes it easier for water to nd
its way inside the lens. Wipe any water from the lens before adjusting
zoom.
N
A XF18-120mmF4 LM PZ WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.
Control
Control
Description
Description
A
A
Zoom ring Rotate the zoom ring to zoom in or out manually.
B
B
Zoom/focus control ring
Rotate the zoom/focus control ring to zoom in or out
using powered zoom. The zoom speed is proportional
to the speed with which the ring is rotated.
C
C
Z/F (zoom/focus) button
Switch the role of zoom/focus control ring from focus
to zoom or vice versa.
D
D
Zoom buttons
Press a zoom button to zoom in or out at a steady
speed using powered zoom. Zoom ends when the
button is pressed a second time.
N
•
The Z/F and zoom buttons can be assigned other roles using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn)
SETTING.
•
The speed at which zoom can be adjusted via the zoom buttons can
be chosen using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING> LENS ZOOM/FOCUS
SETTING.
315
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Use optional external ash units for ash photography.
Some units support high-speed sync (FP) and can be used
at shutter speeds faster than the ash sync speed, while
others can function as commanders controlling remote
units via optical wireless ash control.
O
You may be unable to test- re the ash in some circumstances, for ex-
ample when a setup menu is displayed on the camera.
Red-Eye Removal
Red-eye removal is available when FLASH is selected for F FLASH
SETTING> RED EYE REMOVAL. Red-eye removal minimizes “red-eye”
caused when light from the ash is re ected from the subject’s retinas.
Flash Sync Speed
The ash will synchronize with the mechanical shutter at shutter speeds of
1⁄250s or slower and with the electronic shutter as speeds of 1⁄125s or slower.
Optional Flash Units from Fuji lm
The camera can be used with optional Fuji lm shoe-mounted ash units.
Third-Party Flash Units
Do not use third-party ash units that apply over 300V to the camera hot
shoe.
316
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Flash Settings
1
Connect the unit to the camera.
2
In shooting mode, select FLASH
FUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASH
SETTING) menu tab. The options
available vary with the ash unit.
FLASH SETTING
RED EYE REMOVAL
TTL-LOCK MODE
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
EXIT
Menu
Menu
Description
Description
P
P
EF-X8
Displayed when an optional EF-X8 fl ash unit is mounted
on the hot shoe and raised.
317
SYNC
TERMINAL
Adjust settings for fl ash units connected via the sync
terminal. SYNC TERMINAL is displayed if the EF-X8 is
lowered and either no fl ash unit, or an incompatible fl ash
unit, is mounted on the hot shoe.
319
SHOE MOUNT
FLASH
Displayed when an optional fl ash unit other than the
EF-X8 is mounted on the hot shoe and turned on.
320
COMMANDER
(OPTICAL)
Displayed if an optional fl ash unit functioning as a com-
mander for Fujifi lm optical wireless remote fl ash control is
connected and turned on.
323
3
Highlight items using the focus stick
(focus lever) and rotate the rear com-
mand dial to change the highlighted
setting.
EF-X8
MODE
END
ADJUST
4
Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into e ect.
317
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
EF-X8
The following settings are available when an optional EF-X8
shoe-mounted ash unit is attached.
END
ADJUST
EF-X8
MODE
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
A
Flash control mode
Choose from the following options:
•
TTL: TTL mode. Adjust fl ash compensation (
B
) and choose
a fl ash mode (
C
).
•
M: The fl ash fi res at the selected output (
B
) regardless of
subject brightness or camera settings. Output is expressed
in fractions of full power, from ⁄ to ⁄. The desired results
may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits
of the fl ash control system; take a test shot and check the
results.
•
C (COMMANDER): Choose if the fl ash is being used to con-
trol remote synced fl ash units, for example as part of a stu-
dio fl ash system.
•
D (OFF): The EF-X8 does not fi re. Flash units connected
via the sync terminal will still fi re when the shutter is re-
leased, but can be disabled by lowering the EF-X8 and turn-
ing the units off in the fl ash settings menu.
B
Flash compensation/
output
Adjust fl ash level. The options available vary with the fl ash
control mode (
A
).
318
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
C
Flash mode (TTL)
Choose a fl ash mode for TTL fl ash control. The options avail-
able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
•
E (FLASH AUTO): The fl ash fi res only as required; fl ash lev-
el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-
cates that the fl ash will fi re when the photo is taken.
•
F (STANDARD): The fl ash fi res with every shot if possible;
fl ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
fl ash will not fi re if not fully charged when the shutter is
released.
•
G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the fl ash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The fl ash will not fi re if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.
D
Sync
Choose whether the fl ash is timed to fi re immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in
most circumstances.
319
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
SYNC TERMINAL
The following options are available when no compatible ash
unit is connected or if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or
uses only the X-contact on the hot shoe.
ADJUST
END
M
ODE
SYNC TERMINAL
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
A
Flash control mode
Choose from the following options:
•
M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts
when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower than
the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if the
unit uses long fl ashes or has a slow response time.
•
D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled.
B
Sync
Choose whether the fl ash is timed to fi re immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in
most circumstances.
The Sync Terminal
Use the sync terminal to connect ash units
that require a sync cable.
320
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
The following options are available when an optional
shoe-mounted ash unit is attached and turned on.
ADJUST
END
M
ODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
A
Flash control mode
The fl ash control mode selected with the fl ash unit. This can
in some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options avail-
able vary with the fl ash.
•
TTL: TTL mode. Adjust fl ash compensation (
B
).
•
M: The fl ash fi res at the selected output regardless of subject
brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be
adjusted from the camera (
B
).
•
MULTI: Repeating fl ash. Compatible shoe-mounted fl ash
units will fi re multiple times with each shot.
•
D (OFF): The fl ash does not fi re. Some fl ash units can be
turned off from the camera.
321
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
B
Flash compensation/
output
The options available vary with fl ash control mode.
•
TTL: Adjust fl ash compensation (the full value may not be
applied if the limits of the fl ash control system are exceed-
ed). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the select-
ed value is added to the value selected with the fl ash unit.
•
M/MULTI: Adjust fl ash output (compatible units only).
Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power,
from ⁄ (mode M) or ¼ (MULTI) down to ⁄ in increments
equivalent to ⁄EV. The desired results may not be achieved
at low values if they exceed the limits of the fl ash control
system; take a test shot and check the results.
C
Flash mode (TTL)
Choose a fl ash mode for TTL fl ash control. The options avail-
able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
•
E (FLASH AUTO): The fl ash fi res only as required; fl ash lev-
el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-
cates that the fl ash will fi re when the photo is taken.
•
F (STANDARD): The fl ash fi res with every shot if possible;
fl ash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
fl ash will not fi re if not fully charged when the shutter is
released.
•
G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the fl ash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The fl ash will not fi re if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.
322
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
D
Sync
Control fl ash timing.
•
H (1ST CURTAIN): The fl ash fi res immediately after the shut-
ter opens (generally the best choice).
•
I (2ND CURTAIN): The fl ash fi res immediately before the
shutter closes.
•
R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-
speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the fl ash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for fl ash control mode.
E
Zoom
The angle of illumination (fl ash coverage) for units that sup-
port fl ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-
matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
F
Lighting
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
•
J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing
coverage.
•
K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
•
L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for
more even lighting.
G
LED light
Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photog-
raphy (compatible units only): as a catchlight (
M
/CATCHLIGHT),
as an AF-assist illuminator (
N
/AF ASSIST), or as both a catch-
light and an AF-assist illuminator (
O
/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT).
Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography.
G
Number of ashes
*
Choose the number of times the fl ash fi res each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
H
Frequency
*
Choose the frequency at which the fl ash fi res in MULTI mode.
* Full value may not be applied if limits of fl ash control system are exceeded.
323
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)
The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning
as a commander for Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control.
ADJUST
END
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)
MODE
Fuji lm optical wireless remote ash control o ers a choice of
four channels (Channels 1 through 4) for the exchange of optical
signals between the commander and remote ash units. Sepa-
rate channels can be used for di erent ash systems or to pre-
vent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
The ash units can also be placed in up to
three groups (A, B, and C) and ash mode
and ash level adjusted separately for
each group.
BB
A
C
324
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
A
Flash control mode
(group A)
Choose fl ash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%
is available for groups A and B only.
•
TTL: The units in the group fi re in TTL mode. Flash com-
pensation can be adjusted separately for each group.
•
TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you can
specify the output of the selected group as a percent-
age of the other and adjust overall fl ash compensation
for both groups.
•
M: In mode M, the units in the group fi re at the selected
output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardless
of subject brightness or camera settings.
•
MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units
in all groups to repeating fl ash mode. All units will fi re
multiple times with each shot.
•
D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will
not fi re.
B
Flash control mode
(group B)
C
Flash control mode
(group C)
D
Flash compensation/
output (group A)
Adjust fl ash level for the selected group according to
option selected for fl ash control mode. Note that the full
value may not be applied if the limits of the fl ash control
system are exceeded.
•
TTL: Adjust fl ash compensation.
•
M/MULTI: Adjust fl ash output.
•
TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B and
adjust overall fl ash compensation.
E
Flash compensation/
output (group B)
F
Flash compensation/
output (group C)
325
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
G
Flash mode (TTL)
Choose a fl ash mode for TTL fl ash control. The options
available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) se-
lected.
•
E (FLASH AUTO): The fl ash fi res only as required; fl ash
level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A
picon displayed when the shutter button is pressed
halfway indicates that the fl ash will fi re when the photo
is taken.
•
F (STANDARD): The fl ash fi res with every shot if possi-
ble; fl ash level is adjusted according to subject bright-
ness. The fl ash will not fi re if not fully charged when the
shutter is released.
•
G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the fl ash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The fl ash will not fi re if not
fully charged when the shutter is released.
H
Sync
Control fl ash timing.
•
H (1ST CURTAIN): The fl ash fi res immediately after the
shutter opens (generally the best choice).
•
I (2ND CURTAIN): The fl ash fi res immediately before the
shutter closes.
•
R
(AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-
speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the fl ash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for fl ash control mode.
I
Zoom
The angle of illumination (fl ash coverage) for units that sup-
port fl ash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-
matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
J
Lighting
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
•
J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly re-
ducing coverage.
•
K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
•
L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage
for more even lighting.
326
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
External Flash Units
Setting
Setting
Description
Description
K
Commander
Choose the group for units functioning as a command-
er for Fujifi lm optical wireless remote fl ash control in TTL,
TTL%, or M mode. This option is available only with clip-
on fl ash units that support Fujifi lm optical wireless remote
fl ash control.
•
Gr A: Assign the commander to group A.
•
Gr B: Assign the commander to group B.
•
Gr C: Assign the commander to group C.
•
OFF: Output from the commander is held to a level that
does not aff ect the fi nal picture.
K
Number of ashes
Choose the number of times the fl ash fi res each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
L
Channel
Choose the channel used by the commander for commu-
nication with the remote fl ash units. Separate channels
can be used for diff erent fl ash systems or to prevent in-
terference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
L
Frequency
Choose the frequency at which the fl ash fi res in MULTI
mode.
327
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Vertical Battery Grips
The VG-XH vertical battery grip can be used to supplement
the camera battery or when holding the camera rotated to
take pictures in portrait (“tall”) orientation.
A
Fn1 button
B
WB button
C
ISO button
D
Shutter button
E
Control lock
F
Front command dial
G
Lock screw knob
H
Tripod socket
I
Eyelet for camera strap
J
Connector cover
K
Lock screw
L
Serial number plate
M
Focus stick (focus lever)
N
Rear command dial
O
AFON button
P
AEL (exposure lock) button
Q
Q (quick menu) button
R
Indicator lamps
S
Performance selector
T
Battery tray
U
Battery-chamber cover latch
V
Connector
W
Compartment for connector cover
supplied with camera
N
All controls perform the same function as the matching controls on
the camera.
328
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip
(A)
(B)
N
•
Check that the camera is o before attaching or removing the vertical
battery grip.
•
The camera le transmitter/vertical battery grip connector cover (A)
can be stored in the grip connector cover compartment. Keep the
grip contact cap (B) in a safe place when not in use.
O
•
Fully tighten the lock screw knob after attaching the grip.
•
Do not touch the contacts.
•
After removing the grip, replace the le transmitter/vertical battery
grip connector cover (A) and contact cap (B).
•
The grip is not waterproof, and caution is required to prevent the en-
try of dirt, dust, water, noxious gases, salt, and other foreign matter.
Do not place the grip on wet surfaces. Before use, be sure that the
battery tray and battery-chamber cover are fully closed.
329
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Vertical Battery Grips
Inserting and Removing Batteries
Insert the batteries as shown.
The batteries can be removed as shown.
N
•
Be sure the camera is o before exchanging batteries.
•
Use only NP-W235 batteries.
330
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Battery Level
When a vertical battery grip is connected, the
camera battery level display shows the camera
battery level and the level of the batteries in-
serted in the VG-XH.
•
The display shows the level of inserted batteries only.
•
When a full complement of batteries are inserted in the camera and the
VG-XH, the batteries will be used in the following order:
A
The left grip battery (L)
B
The right grip battery (R)
C
The camera battery
331
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Vertical Battery Grips
Charging the Batteries
The batteries in the vertical battery grip
will charge when the grip is attached to
a camera that is connected to an AC-5VJ
AC adapter via a USB cable.
The indicator lamps will light green while
the battery charges; the lamp on the left
shows the status of the left battery, the
lamp on the right the status of the right
battery.
Indicator lamp
Indicator lamp
Battery status
Battery status
On Battery charging
Off Charging complete
Blinks Battery fault
O
•
All three batteries charge simultaneously; charging takes about
330minutes.
•
Using a device that supplies power with an outputs of 45W or above
reduces charging times to as little as 180minutes.
•
The batteries will not charge while the camera is on.
•
For more information, see “Charging the Battery” (P 46) and “The
Battery and Power Supply” (P 348).
332
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
File Transmitters
Attach an optional FT-XH le transmitter to connect to
wireless LAN or Ethernet networks for le upload or teth-
ered photography. The FT-XH can also be used in combi-
nation with a battery inserted in the camera for greater
battery capacity.
A
Fn1 button
B
WB button
C
ISO button
D
Shutter button
E
Control lock
F
Front command dial
G
Lock screw knob
H
Tripod socket
I
Eyelet for camera strap
J
Connector cover
K
Lock screw
L
Serial number plate
M
Focus stick (focus lever)
N
Rear command dial
O
AFON button
P
AEL (exposure lock) button
Q
Q (quick menu) button
R
Indicator lamps
S
Performance selector
T
Battery tray
U
Battery-chamber cover latch
V
USB connector cover
W
LAN connector cover
X
USB connector (Type-C)
Y
Hole to screw USB cable
Z
LAN connector
a
Connector
b
Compartment for connector cover
supplied with camera
333
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
File Transmitters
N
•
The controls on the FT-XH perform the same functions as the match-
ing controls on the camera.
•
The USB (Type-C) connector is for smartphone tethering only. Use
the camera USB connector when uploading pictures to a comput-
er or smartphone, performing tethered photography via USB, or
charging batteries.
•
For information for accessing network/USB features while the le
transmitter is connected, visit:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/
Attaching the File Transmitter
The procedure is the same as for vertical battery grips (P 328).
Inserting and Removing Batteries
The procedure is the same as for vertical battery grips (P 329).
O
Access to the network/USB features in only available when a battery
is inserted in the camera and at least one battery is inserted in the
transmitter.
Charging the Batteries
The procedure is the same as for vertical battery grips (P 331).
334
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Cooling Fans
Cooling fans help keep the camera cool, allowing longer
periods of non-stop movie recording.
Attaching a Cooling Fan
Open the monitor and attach an FAN-001 cooling fan.
O
Turn the camera o before attaching or removing the fan.
1
Open the monitor.
2
Remove the camera cooling fan connector cover and the
fan connector cap.
After removing the cooling fan connector cover (A), attach
it to the fan for safe-keeping. Keep the fan connector cap (B)
in a safe place.
(A)
(A)
(B)
335
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Cooling Fans
3
Place the fan on the camera, making sure the screws and
connectors are correctly aligned.
4
Tighten the screws.
N
The cooling fan may fall o if the screws are not su ciently tight-
ened.
336
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Cooling Fans
Using the Fan
Fan speed can be adjusted using the A SHOOTING SETTING>
xF COOLING FAN SETTING and B MOVIE SETTING>
xF COOLING FAN SETTING options in the photo and movie
menus, respectively. Select OFF to turn the fan o .
O
At some speeds, the noise of the fan may be audible in movies record-
ed with the camera.
337
Technical Notes
338
Technical Notes
12
Accessories from Fuji lm
The following optional accessories are available from Fuji lm.
For the latest information on the accessories available in your
region, check with your local Fuji lm representative or visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
NP-W235: Additional high-capacity NP-W235 rechargeable batteries can be pur-
chased as required.
Dual battery chargers
Dual battery chargers
BC-W235: The BC-W235 can charge up to two NP-W235 batteries at a time. At
+25°C/+77°F, the batteries will charge in about 200minutes. Using a device that
supplies power with an outputs of 30W or above reduces charging times to as
little as 150minutes.
Eye cups
Eye cups
EC-XH W/EC-XT L/EC-XT M/EC-XT S/EC-GFX: Attach viewfi nder eyecups to prevent light
leaking into the viewfi nder window.
Remote releases
Remote releases
RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time ex-
posure (
⌀2.5mm).
Stereo microphones
Stereo microphones
MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording.
FUJINON lenses
FUJINON lenses
XF-/XC-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
FUJINON MKX-series lenses: Cinema lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount.
Macro extension tubes
Macro extension tubes
MCEX-11/16: Attach between the camera and the lens to shoot at high reproduc-
tion ratios.
Teleconverters
Teleconverters
XF1.4X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 1.4×.
XF2X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 2.0×.
339
Technical Notes
12
Accessories from Fuji lm
Mount adapters
Mount adapters
FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER: Allows the camera to be used with a wide selection
of M-mount lenses.
Body caps
Body caps
BCP-001: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached.
Shoe-mounted ash units
Shoe-mounted ash units
EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL fl ash control, this clip-on fl ash unit has a
Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-
lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the fl ash sync speed. Featuring
support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fujifi lm optical wireless fl ash
control, it can be used as a commander or remote fl ash unit for remote wireless
fl ash photography.
EF-BP1: A battery pack for EF-X500 fl ash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries.
EF-60: In addition to manual and TTL fl ash control, this clip-on fl ash unit has a
Guide Number of 60/197 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-
lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the fl ash sync speed. It can also
be used as remote fl ash under the control of an optional EF-W1 wireless com-
mander.
EF-W1: With support for the NAS
*
wireless communication standard developed
by Nissin Japan, this wireless fl ash commander can be used with optional EF-60
clip-on fl ash units and other NAS-compliant units.
* NAS is a registered trademark of Nissin Japan Ltd.
EF-X8: This compact, clip-on fl ash unit draws power from the camera has a Guide
Number of approximately 8/26 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and can cover the angle of view of
a 16 mm lens (equivalent to 24 mm in 35 mm format).
EF-42: This clip-on fl ash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL fl ash control.
EF-X20: This clip-on fl ash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL fl ash control.
EF-20: This clip-on fl ash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports TTL fl ash control (manual fl ash control is not supported).
Vertical battery grips
Vertical battery grips
VG-XH: See “Vertical battery grips” (P 327).
340
Technical Notes
12
Accessories from Fuji lm
File transmitters
File transmitters
FT-XH: See “File Transmitters” (P 332).
Cooling fans
Cooling fans
FAN-001: See “Cooling Fans” (P 334).
Grip belts
Grip belts
GB-001: Improves grip. Combine with a hand grip for more secure handling.
Cover kits
Cover kits
CVR-XH: A set of covers for the X-H2S. Contains a sync terminal cap, a hot-shoe
cover, and a memory card slot cover, as well as two fi le transmitter/vertical bat-
tery grip connector covers.
instax SHARE printers
instax SHARE printers
SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax fi lm.
341
Technical Notes
12
Software for Use with Your Camera
The camera can be used with the following software. For the
latest information on software available from Fuji lm, visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Smartphone Apps
Establish a wireless connection between your camera and a
smartphone or tablet.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is RAW conver-
sion software from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. View RAW
pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats.
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is available free of
charge from the Fuji lm website.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/software/raw-file-converter-
ex-powered-by-silkypix/
N
•
“RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX” is supplied by Ichikawa
Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd.
•
For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-
powered-by-silkypix/
342
Technical Notes
12
Capture One Express for Fuji lm
View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into oth-
er formats. Capture One Express for Fuji lm is available free of
charge from Capture One A/S.
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm
N
Visit the website above for information on when support will be avail-
able.
Capture One for Fuji lm
Capture One for Fuji lm work ow software from Capture One
A/S supports tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pic-
tures into other formats.
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm
N
Visit the website above for information on when support will be avail-
able.
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom)
A plug-in for Adobe Lightroom Classic.
•
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO/FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/adobe-photoshop-lightroom-
tether-plugin/
FUJIFILM X Acquire
This computer application lets you connect to the camera via USB
or Wi-Fi and automatically download photos to a speci ed folder
as they are taken, or backup and restore the camera via USB.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-acquire/
343
Technical Notes
12
Software for Use with Your Camera
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO
When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO can use the camera’s unique image processing
engine to rapidly convert RAW les to create high-quality images
in other formats.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-raw-studio/
344
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
•
Read Instructions
Read Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the appliance is operated.
•
Retain Instructions
Retain Instructions: The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
•
Heed Warnings
Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
•
Follow Instructions
Follow Instructions: All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
Installation
Installation
Power Sources: This video product should be operated only
from the type of power source indicated on the marking la-
bel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your
home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com-
pany. For video products intended to operate from battery
power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped
with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fi t into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing
the plug. If the plug should still fail to fi t, contact your electri-
cian to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety
purpose of the polarized plug.
Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with
a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fi t into a grounding-type
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to
insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re-
place your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose
of the grounding type plug.
Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension
cords as this can result in a risk of fi re or electric shock.
Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prod-
uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings
must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never
be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug,
or other similar surface.
This video product should not be placed in a built-in instal-
lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is
provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been ad-
hered to. This video product should never be placed near or
over a radiator or heat register.
Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by
the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near wa-
ter—for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink,
or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool,
and the like.
Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed
so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by
items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten-
tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the appliance.
Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable
cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may
fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance
should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should
use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufac-
turer.
An appliance and cart combination
should be moved with care. Quick
stops, excessive force, and uneven
surfaces may cause the appliance and
cart combination to overturn.
Antennas
Antennas
Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable
system is connected to the video product, be sure the an-
tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No.
70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of
the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in
wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding con-
ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS
PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
Ground Clamp
t
Electric Service Equipment
e Equipment
A
A
ntenn
a
Le
ad
in
W
ir
e
A
A
Antenna
An
Discharge Unit
D
(NEC SECTION
N
810-20)
8
Ground Clamps
Power Service Grounding Electrode
System (NEC ART 250. PART H)
Groun
d
in
g
Con
d
uctors
(
NE
C
SECTION 810-21
)
345
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat-
ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric
light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power
lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system,
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such
power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
Use
Use
Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be-
fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into
this video product through openings as they may touch dan-
gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in
a fi re or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the
video product.
Lightning: For added protection for this video product re-
ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended
and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall
outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will
prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and
power-line surges.
Service
Service
Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product
yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualifi ed service personnel.
Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from
the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualifi ed service person-
nel under the following conditions:
•
When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged
•
If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
video product.
•
If the video product has been exposed to rain or water.
•
If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has
been damaged.
If the video product does not operate normally follow the
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are
covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjust-
ment of other controls may result in damage and will often
require extensive work by a qualifi ed technician to restore
the video product to its normal operation.
When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance — this indicates a need for service.
Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be
sure the service technician has used replacement parts spec-
ifi ed by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as
the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in
fi re, electric shock or other hazards.
Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this video product, ask the service technician to perform
safety checks to determine that the video product is in prop-
er operating condition.
Be sure to read these notes before use
Safety Notes
•
Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these
safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use.
•
After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.
About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-
formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is
used incorrectly as a result.
WARNING
WARNING
This icon indicates that death or serious in-
jury can result if the information is ignored.
CAUTION
CAUTION
This icon indicates that personal injury or
material damage can result if the informa-
tion is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information re-
quires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the
action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).
The symbols on the product (including the accesories) rep-
resent the following:
AC
DC
Class II equipment (The construction of the product
is double-insulated.)
WARNING
WARNING
Unplug
from power
socket
If a problem arises, turn the camera o , remove the
If a problem arises, turn the camera o , remove the
battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC
battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC
power adapter.
power adapter. Continued use of the camera when
it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor,
or is in any other abnormal state can cause a fi re or
electric shock. Contact your Fujifi lm dealer.
Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-
Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-
era or connecting cables.
era or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or
connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt
water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids.
Should liquid fi nd its way into the camera or con-
necting cables, turn the camera off , remove the
battery, disconnect the USB cable, and disconnect
and unplug the AC adapter. Continued use of the
camera can cause a fi re or electric shock. Contact
your Fujifi lm dealer.
346
Technical Notes
12
WARNING
WARNING
Do not use in
the bathroom
or shower
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower.
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This
can cause a fi re or electric shock.
Do not
disassemble
Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev-
Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev-
er open the case).
er open the case). Failure to observe this precaution
can cause fi re or electric shock.
Do not touch
internal
parts
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
accident, do not touch the exposed parts.
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-
serve this precaution could result in electric shock
or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-
move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
injury or electric shock, and take the product to the
point of purchase for consultation.
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec-
tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-
tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec-
tion cord.
tion cord. These actions could damage the cord and
cause a fi re or electric shock. If the cord is damaged,
contact your Fujifi lm dealer. Do not use cables with
bent connectors.
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface.
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This
can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause
injury.
Never attempt to take pictures while in motion.
Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do
not use the camera while walking or driving. This
can result in you falling down or being involved in
a traffi c accident.
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a
thunderstorm.
thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due
to induced current from the lightning discharge.
Do not use the battery except as speci ed.
Do not use the battery except as speci ed. Load the
battery as shown by the indicator.
Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not
Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other
abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re-
abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re-
charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re-
charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re-
charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do
charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do
not short batteries or store them with metallic objects.
not short batteries or store them with metallic objects.
Failure to observe these precautions could result
in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or
leaking, causing fi re, burns, or other injury.
Use only batteries or AC power adapters speci ed for
Use only batteries or AC power adapters speci ed for
use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the
use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the
power supply voltage shown.
power supply voltage shown. The use of other power
sources can cause a fi re.
WARNING
WARNING
If the battery leaks and uid gets in contact with your
If the battery leaks and uid gets in contact with your
eyes, skin or clothing, ush the a ected area with clean
eyes, skin or clothing, ush the a ected area with clean
water and seek medical attention or call an emergency
water and seek medical attention or call an emergency
number right away.
number right away.
Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than
Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than
those speci ed here.
those speci ed here. The supplied charger is for use
only with batteries of the type supplied with the
camera. Using the charger to charge conventional
batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries
can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst.
Using a ash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
Using a ash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
visual impairment.
visual impairment. Take particular care when pho-
tographing infants and young children.
Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in
low-temperature burns, particularly during pro-
longed use, at high ambient temperatures, when
HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.,
or with users who suff er from poor circulation or
reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or
similar precautions are recommended.
Do not use in the presence of ammable objects, explo-
Do not use in the presence of ammable objects, explo-
sive gases, or dust.
sive gases, or dust.
When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the
keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the
battery terminals with insulation tape.
battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with
other metallic objects or batteries could cause the
battery to ignite or burst.
Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts
Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts
out of the reach of small children.
out of the reach of small children. Children may
swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical
attention or call emergency.
Keep out of reach of small children.
Keep out of reach of small children. Among the ele-
ments that could cause injury are the strap, which
could become entangled about a child’s neck,
causing strangulation, and the fl ash, which could
cause visual impairment.
Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
This product generates radio-frequency emissions
that could interfere with navigational or medical
equipment.
347
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not use this camera in locations a ected by oil
Do not use this camera in locations a ected by oil
fumes, steam, humidity or dust.
fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a fi re
or electric shock.
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
high temperatures.
high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in loca-
tions such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight.
This can cause a fi re.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can
cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause
injury.
Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is
Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is
still connected.
still connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to
disconnect the AC power adapter. This can damage
the power cord or cables and cause a fi re or electric
shock.
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapt-
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapt-
er in a cloth or blanket.
er in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build
up and distort the casing or cause a fi re.
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not t
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not t
securely into the outlet.
securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this pre-
caution could result in fi re or electric shock.
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to
use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-
use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-
tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter.
tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter.
Failure to do so can cause a fi re or electric shock.
When charging ends, unplug the charger from the
When charging ends, unplug the charger from the
power socket.
power socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the
power socket can cause a fi re.
When a memory card is removed, the card could come
When a memory card is removed, the card could come
out of the slot too quickly. Use your nger to hold it and
out of the slot too quickly. Use your nger to hold it and
gently release the card.
gently release the card. Injury could result to those
struck by the ejected card.
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
shooting.
shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting
in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing
it from the camera.
Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your
Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your
camera.
camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause
a fi re or electric shock. Contact your Fujifi lm dealer
to request internal cleaning every two years. Please
note that this service is not free of charge.
Dispose of the product in accord with location regula-
Dispose of the product in accord with location regula-
tions.
tions.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, re or
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, re or
the like.
the like.
348
Technical Notes
12
The Battery and Power Supply
Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read
the appropriate sections.
WARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
The following describes the proper use of batteries and how
to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or
cause leakage, overheating, fi re, or explosion.
Li-ion Batteries
Li-ion Batteries
Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion
battery.
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery
before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use.
■
■
Notes on the Battery
Notes on the Battery
The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use.
Charge the battery one or two days before use.
Battery life can be extended by turning the camera off when
not in use.
Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted
battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged
spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary,
or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and
insert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the
battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating
devices.
■
■
Charging the Battery
Charging the Battery
The battery can be charged using the camera and supplied
AC adapter or an optional BC-W235 dual battery charger.
Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below
+10 °C (+50 °F) or above +35 °C (+95 °F). Do not attempt to
charge the battery at temperatures above +40 °C (+104 °F); at
temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the battery will not charge.
Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery
does not however need to be fully discharged before charging.
The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after
charging or use. This is normal.
■
■
Battery Life
Battery Life
A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will
hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its ser-
vice life and should be replaced.
If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you
may fi nd that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a
charge. Charge the battery regularly.
■
■
Storage
Storage
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store
it at room temperature with the battery charged to approxi-
mately one half to ⁄ capacity.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, re-
move the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient
temperature of from +15 °C to +25 °C (+59 °F to +77 °F). Do
not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature.
■
■
Cautions: Handling the Battery
Cautions: Handling the Battery
•
Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neck-
laces or hairpins.
•
Do not expose to fl ame or heat.
•
Do not disassemble or modify.
•
Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures.
•
Use with designated chargers only.
•
Dispose of used batteries promptly.
•
Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks.
•
Do not expose to water.
•
Keep the terminals clean.
•
The battery and camera body may become warm to the
touch after extended use. This is normal.
■ Caution:
Disposal
Disposal
Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations.
Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of
battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate.
Do not mechanically crush or split batteries.
AC Power Adapters
AC Power Adapters
•
The AC power adapter is for indoor use only.
•
Be sure the cable is securely connected to the camera.
•
Turn the camera off before disconnecting the adapter. Dis-
connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable.
•
Do not disassemble.
•
Do not expose to high heat and humidity.
•
Do not subject to strong physical shocks.
•
The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during
use. This is normal.
•
If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate
the receiving antenna.
349
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
Using the Camera
•
Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources,
including artifi cial light sources or natural light sources
such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the camera image sensor.
•
Strong sunlight focused through the viewfi nder may dam-
age the panel of electronic viewfi nder (EVF). Do not aim
the electronic viewfi nder at the sun.
Take Test Shots
Take Test Shots
Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as
at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a
test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is
functioning normally. FUJIFILMCorporation cannot accept
liability for damages or lost profi ts incurred as a result of
product malfunction.
Notes on Copyright
Notes on Copyright
Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded
using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways
that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own-
er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing
of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even
when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked
to note that the transfer of memory cards containing images
or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible
within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws.
Handling
Handling
To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject
the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are
being recorded.
Liquid Crystal
Liquid Crystal
In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak-
en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action
indicated should any of the following situations arise:
•
If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the
area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and
running water.
•
If liquid crystal enters your eyes, fl ush the aff ected eye with
clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical
assistance.
•
If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly
with water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom-
iting, then seek medical assistance.
Although the display is manufactured using extremely
high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are
always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and
images recorded with the product are unaff ected.
Trademark Information
Trademark Information
Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of
FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or
registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces
included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Tai-
wan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS,
Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks of
Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a
registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and other countries. Android is a trademark or registered
trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photo-
shop, and Lightroom are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other coun-
tries.
Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and Wi-Fi Protected
Setup® are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance®.
The
Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks
by Fujifi lm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC logos are
trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is a trademark of the CFA
(CompactFlash Association). The HDMI logo is a trademark or
registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade
names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or regis-
tered trademarks of their respective owners.
Electrical Interference
Electrical Interference
This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equip-
ment. Consult with hospital or airline staff before using the
camera in a hospital or on an aircraft.
Color Television Systems
Color Television Systems
NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color tele-
vision telecasting specifi cation adopted mainly in the U.S.A.,
Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color
television system adopted mainly in European countries and
China.
Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera fi le format in which
information stored with photographs is used for optimal col-
or reproduction during printing.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software
Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed soft-
ware without the permission of the applicable governing
bodies is prohibited.
Lenses and Other Accessories
•
Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod.
•
Fujifi lm will not be held liable for performance issues or
damage caused by the use of third-party accessories.
350
Technical Notes
12
NOTICES
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.
Please read the “Safety Notes” and make sure you understand them before using the camera.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply. See:
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
For Customers in the U. S. A.
For Customers in the U. S. A.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25
Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25
FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2)this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro-
vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-
stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the fol-
lowing measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and re-
ceiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit diff erent
from that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifi cations not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in con-
junction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the gov-
ernment’s requirements for exposure to radio waves. This
device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the
emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy
set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.
Government.
The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of
measurement known as the Specifi c Absorption Rate, or SAR.
The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are
conducted using standard operating positions accepted by
the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certifi ed
power level in all tested frequency bands.
Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules,
this product must be used with a Fujifi lm-specifi ed fer-
rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord.
A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers
the product you have purchased. Please call
1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to
recycle this battery.
California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Di-
vision2, Chapter4, Article4, Appliance Ef-
fi ciency Regulations, Sections 1601 through
1609
351
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
For Customers in Canada
For Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B)
CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana-
dian ICES-003.
Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus-
try Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause in-
terference; and (2)This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op-
erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter,
except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection
feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada.
Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scientifi c evi-
dence does not show that any health problems are asso-
ciated with using low power wireless devices. There is no
proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are
absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels
of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while
being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health
eff ects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does
not produce heating eff ects causes no known adverse health
eff ects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not
found any biological eff ects. Some studies have suggested
that some biological eff ects might occur, but such fi ndings
have not been confi rmed by additional research. X-H2S has
been tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
Operation in the band 5150–5250 MHz is only for indoor use
to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-chan-
nel mobile satellite systems.
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in
the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its
packaging indicates that this product shall not
be treated as household waste. Instead it should
be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of
electrical and electronic equipment.
By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent potential negative consequences to the en-
vironment and human health, which could otherwise be
caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
This symbol on the batteries or accumulators
indicates that those batteries shall not be treated
as household waste.
If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accu-
mulators please dispose these separately according to your
local requirements.
The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural re-
sources. For more detailed information about recycling this
product, please contact your local city offi ce, your household
waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including
the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local au-
thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal.
In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates
that they are to be disposed of separately.
Caring for the Camera
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions.
Storage and Use
Storage and Use
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera
in locations that are:
•
exposed to rain, steam, or smoke
•
very humid or extremely dusty
•
exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day
•
extremely cold
•
subject to strong vibration
•
exposed to strong magnetic fi elds, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer,
or magnet
•
in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides
•
next to rubber or vinyl products
352
Technical Notes
12
Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions
This product complies with the following EU Directives:
•
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
•
RE Directive 2014/53/EU
Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF210002 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/x-h2s/pdf/x-h2s_doc-nkt.pdf
The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/x-h2s/pdf/x-h2s_doc-nkt_uk.pdf
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:
This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth®).
•
Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):
WLAN 2.4 GHz: 10.81 dBm
WLAN 5 GHz: 12.56 dBm
Bluetooth: 1.86 dBm
IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the camera’s built-in wireless transmitter.
Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States
Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States
embargoes goods.
•
Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device
Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device
.
. Fujifi lm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized
use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that
may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater
degree of reliability than off ered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions to
ensure safety and prevent malfunction.
•
Use only in the country in which the device was purchased.
Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network
and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device.
Fujifi lm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions.
•
Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic elds, static electricity, or radio interference.
Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic elds, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter in
the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic fi elds, static electricity, or radio interference that
may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of
other wireless devices operating in the 2.4GHz band.
•
The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
•
Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater atten-
tion to security than applies in the case of wired networks.
-
Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed
on your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access
rights.
-
Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.
-
Do not connect this device directly to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated by
providers or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services.
•
The following may be punishable by law:
The following may be punishable by law:
-
Disassembly or modifi cation or this device
-
Removal of device certifi cation labels
•
This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters.
This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also oper-
ates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking
systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications.
•
To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions.
To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Confi rm that the RFID transmitter is not in
operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used
for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the aff ected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that
this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fujifi lm representative.
353
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
•
Do not use this device on board an aircraft.
Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod-
uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when off . This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in
the network/USB setting menu before boarding.
•
Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/
UK/HR. 5150 MHz–5350 MHz is for indoor use only.
Speci c Absorption Rate (SAR) Information
Speci c Absorption Rate (SAR) Information
SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certifi ed output power level in
all frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.235 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue.
U.K. Importer:
FUJIFILM UK Limited
Fujifi lm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom
EU Importer:
FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbH
Fujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany
354
Technical Notes
12
For Your Safety
Be sure to read these notes before using the lens
Safety Notes
•
Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety
notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use.
•
After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.
About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-
formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is
used incorrectly as a result.
WARNING
WARNING
This icon indicates that death or serious
injury can result if the information is ig-
nored.
CAUTION
CAUTION
This icon indicates that personal injury or
material damage can result if the informa-
tion is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information re-
quires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the
action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).
WARNING
WARNING
Do not
immerse
Do not immerse in or expose to water.
Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to ob-
serve this precaution can cause a fi re or electric
shock.
Do not
disassemble
Do not disassemble (do not open the case).
Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure
to observe this precaution can cause fi re, electric
shock, or injury due to product malfunction.
Do not touch
internal
parts
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
accident, do not touch the exposed parts.
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-
serve this precaution could result in electric shock
or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-
move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
injury or electric shock, and take the product to the
point of purchase for consultation.
Do not place on unstable surfaces.
Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may
fall, causing injury.
Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-
Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-
nders.
nders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause
permanent visual impairment.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
Failure to observe this precaution can cause fi re or
electric shock.
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day.
on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution
can cause fi re.
Keep out of the reach of small children.
Keep out of the reach of small children. This product
could cause injury in the hands of a child.
Do not handle with wet hands.
Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this
precaution can cause electric shock.
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
subjects.
subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when
the sun is in or close to the frame can cause fi re
or burns.
When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and
When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and
store out of direct sunlight.
store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the
lens can cause fi re or burns.
Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
to a tripod.
to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other ob-
jects, causing injury.
355
Technical Notes
12
Product Care
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe
the following precautions.
Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after
each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals,
which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body.
Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately with
a soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor,
taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft,
dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gen-
tly with a piece of Fuji lm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning uid has been applied. To prevent dust
entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is in
place.
Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in
identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the im-
age sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING> SENSOR
CLEANING.
356
Technical Notes
12
Cleaning the Image Sensor
Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING>
SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as de-
scribed below.
O
Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if
it is damaged during cleaning.
1
Use a blower (not a brush) to remove
dust from the sensor.
N
Do not use a brush or blower brush.
Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the sensor.
2
Check whether the dust has been successfully removed. Re-
peat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary.
3
Replace the body cap or lens.
357
Technical Notes
12
Firmware Updates
Updates to product rmware may result in changes not
described in the manual. For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
Checking the Firmware Version
O
The camera will only display the rmware version if a memory card is
inserted.
1
Turn the camera o and check that a memory card is inserted.
2
Turn the camera on while pressing the DISP/BACK button. The
current rmware version will be displayed; check the rm-
ware version.
3
Turn the camera o .
N
To view the rmware version or update rmware for optional acces-
sories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted ash units, and
mount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera.
358
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Consult the table below should you encounter problems
using your camera. If you don’t nd the solution here, con-
tact your local Fuji lm distributor.
N
Troubleshooting information for network/USB features is available at:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2s_connection/
Power and Battery
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The camera does not
turn on.
•
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 46).
•
The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct ori-
entation (P 40).
•
The battery-chamber cover is not latched: Latch the bat-
tery-chamber cover (P 40).
The monitor does not
turn on.
The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned off
and then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button
pressed halfway until the monitor activates.
The battery runs down
quickly.
•
The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pock-
et or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera im-
mediately before taking a picture.
•
There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
with a soft, dry cloth.
•
ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING> PRE-AF: Turn
PRE-AF off (P 152).
•
The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 248).
The camera turns o
suddenly.
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a
fully-charged spare battery (P 46).
The camera does not
turn o .
The camera may be busy. Check the indicator lamp
(P 11).
359
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Charging does not start.
•
Make sure that the AC power adapter is correctly plugged
in (P 46).
•
Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to the
AC power adapter (P 46).
•
The battery has not been recharged for an extended period: If
the battery has not been charged for an extended period,
charging will be disabled to ensure safety. Replace it with
a new battery.
Charging does not start
(USB).
•
Insert the camera battery (P 40).
•
Reinsert the camera battery in the correct orientation
(P 40).
•
Confi rm that the camera is connected to the computer
(P 49).
•
If the computer is off or in sleep mode, turn on or wake
the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB ca-
ble (P 49).
Charging does not start
(battery charger).
•
Insert the battery.
•
Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation.
•
The AC adapter is not correctly connected to the charger: Check
that adapter is correctly connected to the charger.
Charging is slow. Charge the battery at room temperature.
The indicator lamp
blinks, but the battery
does not charge.
•
There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
with a soft, dry cloth (P 40).
•
The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 248). If the battery still fails to
charge, contact your Fujifi lm dealer (P 338).
The power supply icon is
not displayed.
Confi rm that POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is se-
lected for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING.
360
Technical Notes
12
Menus and Displays
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Display is not in English.
Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING> Qa
(P 54, 247).
Shooting
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
No picture is taken when
the shutter button is
pressed.
•
The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete
pictures (P 42, 223).
•
The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card
in the camera (P 244).
•
There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts
with a soft, dry cloth.
•
The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card
(P 42).
•
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 46).
•
The camera has turned o automatically: Turn the camera on
(P 50).
•
You are using a third-party mount adapter: Select ON for
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS (P 271).
Mottling (“noise”)
appears in the monitor
or view nder when
the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject is
poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result
in noticeable mottling when images are previewed in the
displays. Images taken with the camera are unaff ected.
The camera does not
focus.
•
The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or man-
ual focus (P 109).
•
The focus area is too small for the intended subject: Increase
the size of the focus area by a couple of steps (P 98).
No panorama is
recorded when the
shutter button is
pressed.
The indicator lamp was orange when you attempted to record a
panorama: Wait until the indicator lamps turns off (P 11).
361
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
No face is detected.
•
The subject’s face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, or
other objects: Remove the obstructions (P 153).
•
The subject’s face occupies only a small area of the frame:
Change the composition so that the subject’s face occu-
pies a larger area of the frame (P 153).
•
The subject’s face is turned away from the camera: Ask the sub-
ject to face the camera (P 153).
•
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is o : Turn g FACE/EYE
DETECTION SETTING on (P 153).
•
The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level.
•
The subject’s face is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
No subject is detected.
•
The subject is partially hidden: Choose a vantage point
where you can see as much of the subject as possible
(P 155).
•
The subject occupies only a small portion of the frame: Get
closer to your subject so it occupies more of the frame
(P 155).
•
OFF is selected for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING: Select
SUBJECT DETECTION ON (P 155).
•
The subject is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
The ash does not re.
•
The ash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 175).
•
The electronic shutter is enabled: Choose a SHUTTER TYPE
that does not use the electronic shutter (P 171).
•
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 46).
•
The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single
frame mode (P 9).
The ash does not fully
light the subject.
•
The subject is not in range of the ash: Position the subject in
range of the fl ash.
•
The ash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly.
•
Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower
shutter speed (P 74, 78, 373).
362
Technical Notes
12
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Pictures are blurred.
•
The lens is dirty: Clean the lens.
•
The lens is blocked: Keep objects away from the lens
(P 57).
•
s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is dis-
played in red: Check focus before shooting (P 58).
Pictures are mottled.
•
Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is high: This
is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
*
Use pixel
mapping (P 141).
* X-rays, cosmic rays, and other forms of radiation interacting
with the image sensor may cause bright spots of various col-
ors such as white, red, and blue. Pixel mapping helps reduce
the occurrence of such bright spots.
•
The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures:
Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool down (P 50,
368).
•
A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera off and
wait for it to cool down (P 50, 368).
363
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Playback
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
Pictures are grainy.
The pictures were taken with a diff erent make or model of
camera.
Playback zoom is
unavailable.
The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a diff erent
make or model of camera.
No sound in movie
playback.
•
Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume
(P 252).
•
The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly
during recording.
•
The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during
playback.
Selected pictures are not
deleted.
Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected.
Remove protection using the device with which it was
originally applied (P 227).
Pictures remain after
ERASE> ALL FRAMES is
selected.
File numbering is
unexpectedly reset.
The battery-chamber cover was opened while the cam-
era was on. Turn the camera off before opening the bat-
tery-chamber cover (P 281).
364
Technical Notes
12
Troubleshooting
Connections
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The monitor is blank.
The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on
the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 60).
Both the TV and camera
monitor are blank.
The display mode selected with the VIEW MODE button is
EVF ONLY +
EVF ONLY +
E
E
: Put your eye to the viewfi nder. Use
the VIEW MODE button to choose another display mode
(P 18).
No picture or sound
on TV.
•
The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera
properly (P 60).
•
Input on the television is set to “TV”: Set input to “HDMI”
(P 60).
•
The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the tele-
vision to adjust the volume (P 60).
Miscellaneous
Problem
Problem
Solution
Solution
The camera is unre-
sponsive.
•
Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert the
battery (P 40).
•
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 46).
•
The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the connec-
tion.
•
The controls are locked: Press and hold the MENU/OK button
to unlock the controls (P 15, 17).
The camera does not
function as expected.
Remove and reinsert the battery (P 40). If the problem
persists, contact your Fujifi lm dealer.
No sound.
Adjust the volume (P 250).
Pressing the Qbutton
does not display the
quick menu.
TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 176).
365
Technical Notes
12
Warning Messages and Displays
The following warnings appear in the display.
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
i (red)
Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged
spare battery.
j (blinks red)
Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery.
s (displayed in red with
red focus frame)
The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on an-
other subject at the same distance, then recompose the
picture.
Aperture or shutter
speed displayed in red
The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be
over- or under-exposed. Use the fl ash for additional light-
ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject.
FOCUS ERROR
Camera malfunction. Turn the camera off , remove the lens,
and check for foreign matter between the lens and the
camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera
on. If the problem persists, contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
LENS CONTROL ERROR
TURN OFF THE CAMERA
AND TURN ON AGAIN
CARD NOT INITIALIZED
•
The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has been
formatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory
card using D USER SETTING> FORMAT.
•
The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-
tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
•
Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
LENS ERROR
Turn the camera off , remove the lens, and check for for-
eign matter between the lens and the camera body, then
replace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem
persists, contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
366
Technical Notes
12
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
CARD ERROR
•
The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: For-
mat the card.
•
The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory card
is damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the
message is repeated, format the card. If the message per-
sists, replace the card.
•
Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card.
•
Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
PROTECTED CARD
The memory card is locked. Unlock the card.
BUSY
The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera
to format the card.
b MEMORY FULL
The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded.
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
space.
WRITE ERROR
•
Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or
turn the camera off and then on again. If the message
persists, contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
•
Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
space.
•
The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card.
•
The memory card was removed while data were being recorded:
Do not remove the memory card during recording.
•
The memory card write speed is slow: When recording mov-
ies, be sure the memory card write speed is fast enough.
FRAME NO. FULL
The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame
number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card and
select RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP> FRAME NO..
Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, then
select CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO..
367
Technical Notes
12
Warning Messages and Displays
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
READ ERROR
•
The le is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The fi le
cannot be viewed.
•
The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-
tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
•
Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifi lm dealer.
PROTECTED FRAME
An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected pic-
ture. Remove protection and try again.
CAN NOT CROP
The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera.
DPOF FILE ERROR
Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy
any additional pictures you wish to print to another memo-
ry card and create a second print order.
CAN NOT SET DPOF
The picture cannot be printed using DPOF.
F CAN NOT SET DPOF
Movies cannot be printed using DPOF.
CAN NOT ROTATE
The selected picture cannot be rotated.
F CAN NOT ROTATE
Movies cannot be rotated.
F CANNOT EXECUTE
The selected operation is not supported: Check whether the
picture was recorded with a diff erent model of camera.
m CANNOT EXECUTE
368
Technical Notes
12
Warning Messages and Displays
Warning
Warning
Description
Description
p (yellow)
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
STANDARD
TEMPERATURE LIMIT
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature al-
lowed when STANDARD is selected for AUTO POWER
OFF TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Turn the
camera off and wait for it to cool.
p (yellow)
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
HIGH TEMPER-
ATURE LIMIT.DO NOT
HOLD CAMERA FOR
LONG PERIODS OF TIME
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature
allowed when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF
TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Remaining
in contact with the camera could result in low-temperature
burns; mount the camera on a tripod or take other steps to
avoid prolonged contact with the camera. The camera will
shortly turn off automatically. Turn the camera off and wait
for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when
this warning is displayed.
p (red)
HIGH TEMPERATURE
LIMIT REACHED
SHUTTING DOWN
The camera temperature has reached the cutoff point and
the camera is about to turn off automatically. Turn the cam-
era off and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pic-
tures taken when this warning is displayed.
369
Technical Notes
12
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the recording time or number
of pictures available at di erent image sizes. All gures are
approximate; le size varies with the scene recorded, pro-
ducing wide variations in the number of les that can be
stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may
not diminish at an even rate.
Capacity
Capacity
T
T
SD/CFexpress memory cards
SD/CFexpress memory cards
64GB
64GB
FINE
FINE
NORMAL
NORMAL
Photos
Photos
O
O
3
3
∶
∶
2
2
4080 6040
RAW (UNCOMPRESSED)
RAW (UNCOMPRESSED) 1090
RAW
RAW
(LOSSLESS COMPRESSED)
(LOSSLESS COMPRESSED)
1990
RAW (COMPRESSED)
RAW (COMPRESSED)
2760
Movies
Movies
*
*
V
V
2160
2160
80 minutes
W
W
1080
1080
80 minutes
* Assumes default bit rate.
O
•
The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary with the
settings selected (P 68).
•
Shots over an hour in length may be recorded across multiple les without
interruption. In addition, movies over 4GB in size will be recorded unin-
terrupted across multiple les to SD memory cards with capacities 32GB
or less.
370
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
System
Model FUJIFILM X-H2S
Product Number FF210002
E ective pixels Approx. 26.16 million
Image sensor 23.5 mm× 15.6 mm (APS-C), X-Trans CMOS 5 HS sensor with
primary color fi lter
Storage media Fujifi lm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC and CFexpress Type B
memory cards
Memory card slots
•
SD memory card slot (UHS-II compliant) ×1
•
CFexpress memory card slot (Type B) ×1
File system
•
Still pictures: Compliant with DCF 2.0
•
Compressed: Exif 2.32 JPEG-baseline compliant; DPOF compli-
ant; HEIF compliant (4 : 2 : 2, 10-bit)
•
Uncompressed or compressed using a reversible or non-reversible
algorithm: RAW (original RAF format; special-purpose software
required); RAW+JPEG available; TIFF (RGB)
•
Movies: Compliant with HEVC/H.265, H.264, and ProRes
•
Audio (including voice memos):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only)
•
Audio (via XLR microphone adapter):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling; four chan-
nels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only; two channels: 16-bit, 48 kHz
sampling)
Image size
O
3∶2 (
6240 × 4160
)
O 1∶1 (4160 × 4160)
O 16∶9 (6240 × 3512)
P
3∶2 (
4416 × 2944
)
P 1∶1 (2944 × 2944)
P 16∶9 (4416 × 2488)
Q
3∶2 (
3120 × 2080
)
Q 1∶1 (2080 × 2080)
Q 16∶9 (3120 × 1760)
RAW (6240 × 4160) TIFF (6240 × 4160)
O
panorama
: vertical (2160 × 9600)/horizontal (9600 × 1440)
P
panorama
: vertical (2160 × 6400)/horizontal (6400 × 1440)
371
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
System
Lens mount FUJIFILM X mount
Sensitivity
•
Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to
ISO160 – 12800 in increments of ⁄EV; AUTO 1–3; extended
output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 80, 100, 125, 25600, or
51200
•
Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO160 – 12800
in increments of ⁄EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equiv-
alent to ISO 25600
Metering 256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering;
MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED
Exposure control Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE;
aperture-priority AE; manual exposure
Exposure compensation
•
Still pictures: −5EV – +5EV in increments of ⁄EV
•
Movies: −2EV – +2EV in increments of ⁄EV
Shutter speed
•
MECHANICAL SHUTTER, E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER, E-FRONT +
MECHANICAL
⁃ Mode P: 4s to ⁄s
⁃ Mode A: 30s to ⁄s
⁃ Modes S and M: 15min. to ⁄s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60min.
•
ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
⁃ Mode P: 4s to ⁄s
⁃ Mode A: 30s to ⁄s
⁃ Modes S and M: 15min. to ⁄s
⁃ Bulb: Fixed at 1s
•
MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC, E-FRONT + MECHANICAL +ELECTRONIC
⁃ Mode P: 4s to ⁄s
⁃ Mode A: 30s to ⁄s
⁃ Modes S and M: 15min. to ⁄s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
372
Technical Notes
12
System
Continuous
CONTINUOUS MODE
CONTINUOUS MODE
Available frame advance rates
Available frame advance rates
(JPEG)
(JPEG)
40fps(1.25X CROP)
40fps(1.25X CROP)
*
*
40
30fps(1.25X CROP)
30fps(1.25X CROP)
*
*
30
20fps(1.25X CROP)
20fps(1.25X CROP)
*
*
20
15fps(1.25X CROP)
15fps(1.25X CROP)
*
*
15
10fps(1.25X CROP)
10fps(1.25X CROP)
*
*
10
40fps
40fps
*
*
40
30fps
30fps
*
*
30
20fps
20fps
*
*
20
15fps
15fps 15
10fps
10fps 10
8.0fps
8.0fps 8.0
7.0fps
7.0fps 7.0
5.0fps
5.0fps 5.0
3.0fps
3.0fps 3.0
* Available with electronic shutter only.
O
The frame rate and number of frames per burst var-
ies with shooting conditions and type of memory
card used.
Focus
•
Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring
•
Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/
phase-detection AF)
•
Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL
White balance Auto (WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, AMBIENCE PRIORITY), Custom 1,
Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sun-
light, shade, daylight fl uorescent, warm white fl uorescent,
cool white fl uorescent, incandescent, underwater
Self-timer Off , 2 sec., 10 sec.
373
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
System
Flash mode
•
MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.),
MANUAL, MULTI, OFF
•
SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (high-
speed sync)
•
RED
EYE
REMOVAL: L FLASH, OFF
Hot shoe Provided (supports TTL fl ash control); supports sync speeds as
fast as ¹⁄₂₅₀s (mechanical shutter) or ¹⁄₁₂₅s (electronic shutter)
Sync contact X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as ½ s (mechanical
shutter) or ⁄s (electronic shutter)
Sync terminal Provided
Electronic view nder
(EVF)
0.5-in., 5760k-dot OLED viewfi nder; magnifi cation 0.80× with
50mm lens (35mm format equivalent) at infi nity and diopter
set to −1.0 m
−1
; diagonal angle of view approximately 40°
(horizontal angle of view approximately 32°)
•
Diopter adjustment: −5 to +3m
−1
•
Eyepoint: Approximately 24mm
LCD monitor
•
Rear monitor: 3.0-in/7.6 cm, 1620k-dot color touch screen
LCD monitor, Vari-angle LCD monitor
•
Shoulder monitor: 1.28-in/3.25 cm, 128 × 128-dot memory
LCD monitor
Movies
(with stereo sound)
•
Movie size: J 3:2, V 16∶9, d 17∶9, W 16∶9, W 17∶9
•
Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P
•
Recording/output format:
- H.265 (10-bit MOV 4 : 2 : 2/4 : 2 : 0; 720, 360, 200, 100, or 50
Mbps)
- H.264 (8-bit MOV/MP4 4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50Mbps)
- ProRes 422 HQ, ProRes 422, ProRes 422 LT (10-bit MOV
4 : 2 : 2)
- HDMI output supported (RAW output supported with
Atomos and Blackmagic Design external recorders; 8-bit
4 : 2 : 2/10-bit 4 : 2 : 2)
374
Technical Notes
12
System
High-speed movies
•
Movie size: V 16∶9, d 17∶9, W 16∶9, W 17∶9
•
Frame advance rate: 240P
*
, 200P
*
, 120P, 100P
* W only.
Input/output terminals
Microphone connector
⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jack
Headphone jack socket
⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jack
Remote release connector
⌀2.5 mm 3-pole mini jack
Digital input/output USB connector (Type-C) USB3.2 Gen2x1
HDMI output HDMI connector (Type A)
375
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
Power supply/other
Power supply NP-W235 rechargeable battery (supplied with camera)
Battery life
•
Battery type: NP-W235
•
Lens: XF35mmF1.4 R
•
External ash units: Disabled
•
Shooting mode: Mode P
Number of shots
Number of shots
PERFORMANCE
PERFORMANCE
LCD
LCD
EVF
EVF
BOOST
1
1
Approx. 530 Approx. 390
NORMAL Approx. 580 Approx. 550
ECONOMY Approx. 720 Approx. 610
Number of shots (VG-XH vertical battery grip)
Number of shots (VG-XH vertical battery grip)
PERFORMANCE
PERFORMANCE
LCD
LCD
EVF
EVF
BOOST
1
1
Approx. 1410 Approx. 1040
NORMAL Approx. 1520 Approx. 1440
ECONOMY Approx. 1850 Approx. 1580
Total length of footage that can be recorded on
Total length of footage that can be recorded on
a single charge
a single charge
Mode
Mode
Actual battery life
Actual battery life
of movie capture
of movie capture
Continuance
Continuance
battery life of
battery life of
movie capture
movie capture
J
J
2
2
Approx. 90minutes Approx. 120minutes
V
3
3
Approx. 70minutes Approx. 105minutes
W
3
3
Approx. 95minutes Approx. 165minutes
High-speed movies
4
4
Approx. 60minutes –
1 EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) selected EVF/LCD
BOOST SETTING.
2 At a frame rate of 29.97fps.
3 At a frame rate of 59.94fps.
4 V at a frame rate of 120 fps.
CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera
and SD memory card.
Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level and
the fi gures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endur-
ance will decline at low temperatures.
376
Technical Notes
12
Power supply/other
Camera size
(W × H × D)
136.3 mm× 92.9 mm× 84.6 mm (42.8 mm excluding projections,
measured at thinnest part)/5.37 in.× 3.66 in.× 3.33 in. (1.69 in.)
Camera weight Approx. 579 g/20.5 oz., excluding battery, accessories, and
memory card
Shooting weight Approx. 660 g/23.3 oz., including battery and memory card
Operating conditions
•
Temperature: −10 °C to +40 °C/+14 °F to +104 °F (+5 °C to
+40 °C/+41 °F to +104 °F when battery is charging)
•
Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation)
Wireless transmitter
Wireless LAN
Standards IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol)
Operating frequency
(center frequency)
•
Indonesia
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
•
USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,745 MHz–5,825 MHz (UNII-3)
•
European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, New
zealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore,
Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain,
Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan, Israel
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,500 MHz–5,700 MHz (W56)
Access protocols Infrastructure
Bluetooth®
Standards Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy)
Operating frequency
(center frequency)
2,402 MHz–2,480 MHz
377
Technical Notes
12
Speci cations
NP-W235 rechargeable battery
Nominal voltage 7.2 V
Nominal capacity 2350 mAh
Rating capacity 2200 mAh
Operating
temperature
0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
38.92 mm× 22.8 mm× 52.26 mm/
1.5 in.× 0.9 in.× 2.1 in.
Weight Approx. 79 g/2.8 oz.
AC-5VJ AC power adapter
Manufacturer Dongguan Yingiu Power Co.,Ltd.
Address No.6 Yongxing Road, Shayao Village, Shijie Town,
523292 Dongguan City, Guangdong Province,
PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Model name AC-5VJ
Rated input 100 V – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Input capacity Max. 50 VA
Rated output DC5.0V 3.0A 15.0W
Average active e ciency 84.8 %
E ciency at load 10% 84.2 %
No-load power consumption 0.02 W
Operating temperature 0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
Weight Approx. 45 g ± 2 g/1.6 oz. ± 0.1 oz.
O
Speci cations and performance are subject to change without notice.
Fuji lm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
The appearance of the product may di er from that described in this
manual.
378
MEMO
379
MEMO
7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN
https://fujifilm-x.com
